JP2020036970A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with rich playability between flags.SOLUTION: A Pachinko slot machine performs CT being an additional chance zone, when an MB is internally won during a normal ART and is shifted between MB flags. During the CT, a CT meter related to a pushing order navigation is provided. The CT meter is promoted when a chili replay is won during the CT and demoted when the pushing order bell is not won in the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning. During the CT, when the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the pushing order bell is won, the continuation period is extended, but in the flag conversion lottery, the winning probability changes on the basis of the value of the CT meter.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 103

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is set to a high probability may be referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to navigate, so that the player can control the AT or the ART. You want to have a longer period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART from various viewpoints. For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses that if a specific combination such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning combination, the AT A gaming machine for increasing the number of games is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays a game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

JP 2010-057732 A

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Literature, the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, so that the gaming characteristics tend to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the number of AT games is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to continue playing without being bored.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, a winning combination determined from the plurality of combinations, and a player's stop operation. A game control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of displaying a display mode according to the winning combination by stopping the rotation of the reel and giving a game value according to the display mode. A game machine provided with a predetermined state starting means (for example, main control board 71) capable of starting a predetermined state (for example, CT) when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a game value given in the predetermined state. A variable means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of varying a determination value (for example, the number of sheets during CT) serving as an end condition of the predetermined state; and a result of the variation by the variable means, the determination value is a reference value. When it comes to A predetermined state ending means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of ending the state, wherein the changing means is for a game in which a predetermined combination (for example, F_push order bells 1 to 6) is determined as a winning combination. The determination value may be changed depending on the game value corresponding to the predetermined combination, and may not be changed.

  Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the game in which the predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination in the predetermined state, the game control unit may perform the first display when the mode of the stop operation is the first operation mode. A mode (for example, a bell) can be displayed, and when the mode of the stop operation is a second operation mode (for example, a cactus), the second display mode can be displayed, and the predetermined combination in the predetermined state is won. In the game determined as the role, a notifying means (for example, the information display 14, the display unit 100, the main control board 71, the sub-controller) capable of notifying the player of the first operation mode or the second operation mode. A board 72), wherein the changing unit changes the determination value when the notifying unit notifies the first operation mode, while the changing unit notifies the second operation mode. In Characterized in that it does not change the serial determination value.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention can determine a notification content that can determine which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is to be notified by the notification means in accordance with a predetermined parameter (for example, a CT meter). When the means (for example, the main control board 71) and the specific combination (for example, “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4”) are determined as the winning combination, the parameter updating means capable of updating the predetermined parameter. (For example, the main control board 71).

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the amount of game value provided when the first display mode is displayed and the amount of game value provided when the second display mode is displayed are as follows. It is the same.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to continue playing without being bored.

It is a figure showing the functional flow of the pachislo machine concerning an embodiment of the invention. It is the whole perspective view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is the whole front view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is an outline layout figure inside the case of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachislot machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a positional relationship between a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where a mirror mechanism is attached. It is a longitudinal section of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a fixed screen mechanism. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of irradiation on a front screen mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an irradiation state on a rear screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing | casing. It is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation state of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a figure showing a part of display screen displayed on a sub-display device of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a block diagram showing the composition of the sub control board of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a transition flow of a game state of the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence or absence of the notification of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure showing the symbol arrangement table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the symbol combination table stored in the pachislo machine. It is a diagram showing an internal lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a diagram showing an internal lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure showing the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure showing the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure showing the abbreviation of the winning combination in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a flow of a game in the general game state in the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure showing the CZ lottery table memorized by the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the CZ1 mode up lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the CZ2 point up lottery table stored in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the ART random determination table in CZ stored in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the ART random determination table in CZ stored in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the flow of the game during the normal ART in the pachislo machine. It is a figure showing a flag conversion lottery table during ART stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure showing the ART level decision table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a diagram showing a CT random determination table during ART stored in the pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART additional addition lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure showing the flow of the game during CT in the above-mentioned pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the lottery table during CT memorized by the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the flag change lottery table during CT memorized by the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT addition addition lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure showing the number of sets during CT added to the above-mentioned pachislot machine, and showing a lottery table. It is a figure showing the flow of the game during the bonus in the pachislo machine. It is a diagram showing a bonus type lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the number of ART games during bonus stored in the pachi-slot machine, showing a lottery table. It is a figure showing the CT lottery table at the time of the end of bonus memorized by the above-mentioned pachislot machine. It is a figure showing a flow of an exceptional game in a general game state in the above-mentioned pachislo machine. It is a figure showing a flag change lottery table during non-ART stored in the pachislo machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the notification performed by the main side and the notification performed by the sub side in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing according to the state of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the normal start of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during CZ of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ3 of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during the normal ART of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during CT of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during the BB of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control processing of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check processing of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check processing of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check processing of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CZ-ART termination of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub side navigation control processing of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the player registration process of the said pachislo machine. It is a flowchart which shows the history management processing of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the display screen of the sub display apparatus of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure showing the flow of the game in the above-mentioned pachislo machine during CT precursor. It is a figure showing the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the pachislot machine and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure showing a transition flow of a game state in a pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure showing the correspondence of the internal winning combination and the actually displayed symbol combination in the pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure showing the correspondence of the internal winning combination and the actually displayed symbol combination in the pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during normal ART memorize | stored in the pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART addition addition lottery table memorize | stored in the pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow of the game during CT in the pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CT meter promotion lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the additional CT lottery table memorize | stored in the pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow of the game in CZ in the pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure showing the CZ2 end lottery table memorized by the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure showing the lock lottery table memorized by the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow of the game during the CT precursor in the pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the notification between MB flags in the pachislo machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the correspondence of the notification performed on the main side and the notification performed by the sub side in a pachislo machine. It is a figure showing the correspondence of a lock state and information in a pachislo machine of a modification.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachislot machine showing one embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for performing a game. As a game medium, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can be applied in addition to medals. In the present embodiment, an assist time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT”), which is a function of navigating the formation of a specific small role with a lamp or the like, and a function in which the replay probability is higher than a normal time during a specific play count. A pachi-slot provided with an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) function in which the RT operates simultaneously is described.

[Functional flow of pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, when a player inserts a medal and operates the start lever 6, the pachislot machine 1 obtains one value (eg, 0 to 65535) from a random number in a predetermined numerical range. Hereinafter, a random value is extracted.

  The internal winning combination determination means (main CPU 31 described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means detects a predetermined winning probability from a plurality of winning combinations based on detection of a start operation of a unit game with respect to the start lever 6 by the start switch 6S (see FIG. 30) (establishment of a predetermined starting condition). Determines the internal winning combination.

  By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitted to be displayed along a winning line described later is determined. In addition, the types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which a bonus such as medal payout, replay (replay) operation, and bonus operation are given to a player, and other so-called “losing”. Such a thing is provided.

  Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated, when the player presses the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, the reel stop control means (a main CPU 31 described later, a motor drive circuit described later). 39, stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R described later) perform control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. Do.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, basically, control for stopping rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. . In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number of symbols is four symbols (the maximum number of sliding symbols). ).

  When the internal winning combination that permits the display of the symbol combination relating to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means uses the specified time to change the symbol combination to a winning line (hereinafter, referred to as an “effective line”). ), The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces.

  On the other hand, for a combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the reels are set within the maximum number of sliding pieces so as not to be displayed along the active line by using the specified time. Stop rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R.

  When the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are all stopped in this way, the winning determination means (main CPU 31 described later) determines whether the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line is related to the winning. It determines whether or not.

  That is, the winning determination means determines winning or non-winning of a hand based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line based on the stop of the symbol change by the reel stop control means.

  When it is determined that the game is related to winning, a privilege such as payout of a medal is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) performed first when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first stop operation, and the first stop operation. The stop operation performed next to the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed subsequent to the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, in the above-described series of flows, various effects are produced by using the output of light (video) by the display unit 100, the output of sound by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof. Done.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter, effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines, by lottery, the effect content to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is carried by a sub-control board described later.

  When the content of the effect is determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when the winning or non-winning is determined. I do. As described above, in the pachislo machine 1, by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination, the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed at) is played. Is provided to the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
The functional flow of the pachislot machine 1 has been described above. Next, the structure of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  A housing 60 forming the entire pachislot machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62 a arranged on the upper front of the cabinet 61, and a lower front of the cabinet 61. And a lower door 62b arranged at the bottom. The cabinet 61 houses equipment used for the game (for example, reels). The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 61. The upper door 62a is provided so that the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed, and the lower door 62b is provided so that the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed.

  The upper door 62a has the display unit 100 at the center. The display unit 100 is an effect device that performs effects according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of a sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, for example, but in the present embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used as described later.

  A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided at a substantially central portion of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R described later. The display window 4 displays a cross-up line obliquely to the upper right, a top line in the upper stage, a center line in the middle, a bottom line in the lower stage, and a cross-down line oblique to the lower right.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols out of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays a 3 × 3 symbol. The five lines from the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4 are lines connecting the 3 × 3 symbols displayed on the display window 4 linearly.

  In the present embodiment, the center line among these five lines is an effective line, and a winning determination is made based on a combination of symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for determining a winning.

  The activated line (center line) is activated by operating a MAX bet button 11 described later or by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, “the number of inserted medals” includes both the number of BETs by operating the MAX bet button 11 and the number of inserted medals actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

  In the cabinet 61, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has, on its outer peripheral surface, a reel band on which a symbol row as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for a game is drawn. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  The symbols drawn on each reel band can be visually recognized from the outside of the pachislot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute) and variably displays the symbol row.

  A pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal surface is formed below the display window 4. In the horizontal plane of the base 10, a medal insertion slot 22 is provided on the right side, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1-bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, there is provided a bet button LED 103 (see FIG. 30) that lights up when a medal can be inserted.

  By pressing the MAX bet button 11, the number of medals (three) provided for the unit game (one game) is inserted, and the activated line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted every time the one bet button is pressed once. When the one bet button is operated three times, three medals to be provided for the unit game are inserted, and the activated line is activated.

  The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1-bet button, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 22 (the operation of inserting medals for performing a game) are referred to as “insertion operations”.

  An information display 14 is provided substantially at the center of the pedestal portion 10 in the horizontal plane. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up in accordance with the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter referred to as the inserted number). The information display 14 also includes information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. A digital display (not shown) for digitally displaying to the player is provided.

  In addition, the information display 14 has an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information of a stop operation necessary for displaying a combination of symbols according to the combination determined as the internal winning combination along the activated line. Is provided. The instruction monitor is configured by, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notifies the player of necessary stop operation information by lighting or blinking in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a “push-sequence combination” is provided in which combinations of symbols displayed according to the stop operation sequence (push sequence) are different. The mode uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified is, for example, “1” is displayed when the push order “1st (the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L)” is notified. When the push order “2nd (the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C)” is notified, “2” is displayed, and the push order “3rd (the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R). "3" is displayed when announcing "). The notification of the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 30 described later, the information display 14 is controlled by a main control board 71 via a door relay board 74. Here, in the pachislo machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, the information of the stop operation may be notified by using other means controlled by the sub control board 72, for example, The above-mentioned display unit 100 may notify the information of the stop operation.

  In this case, the mode of notification on the instruction monitor may be different from the mode of notification on other means. In other words, the instruction monitor only needs to notify the information of the stop operation to be reported in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information, and it is not always necessary to directly report the information of the stop operation (for example, “1” in the instruction monitor. Even if it is displayed, there is a possibility that the notification content may not be specified depending on the player, and it cannot be said that the notification is direct.) On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information of the stop operation may be directly reported. For example, when the pressing order “1st” is notified, the indication monitor displays “1” corresponding to the pressing order to be notified uniquely, while the other means (display unit 100) performs the first stop operation by pressing the left stop operation. May be directly notified of the action to be performed on the reel 3L.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the control of the sub control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. Of course, the notification of the information of the stop operation may be controlled according to the game state. More specifically, the information of the stop operation may be reported in the later-described ART game state (see FIG. 33) without reporting the information of the stop operation in the later-described general game state (non-ART).

  Further, on the left side of the front surface of the pedestal section 10, there is provided a settlement button 13 for switching the credit / payout of medals obtained by the player with a push button operation. By the switching of the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout opening 15 at the lower front, and the paid out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

  On the right side of the settlement button 13, a start lever 6 as a start operation means for starting rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by a player's tilting operation and starting symbol change display in the display window 4 is predetermined. It is attached so that it can be tilted within the angle range.

  At substantially the center of the front surface of the pedestal portion 10, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are provided as stop operation means for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R respectively by a pressing operation of the player. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) basically starts when the start lever 6 is operated, and ends when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop.

  A first sub-display 201 and a second sub-display 202 are provided on the front of the upper part of the lower door 62b. The first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device 202 are a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and display various information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are provided on the front surface of the lower door 62 b on the side of the surface that stands substantially perpendicularly to the horizontal plane of the pedestal 10. The first sub-display device 201 is provided on the left side (the MAX bet button 11 or the start lever 6 side), and the second sub-display device 202 is provided on the right side (the medal insertion slot 22 side).

  At least one of the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202, in the present embodiment, a touch sensor 201a is provided on the display surface of the first sub-display device 201, and is provided via the touch sensor 201a. The display can be switched according to the operation of the received player. The touch sensor 201a operates according to a predetermined operation principle such as a capacitance method, and when receiving an operation of a player, outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The first sub display device 201 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 31) based on touch input information output from the touch sensor 201a.

  In the front of the lower part of the lower door 62b, loudspeakers 9L and 9R for effecting sound such as sound effects and sounds are provided on the left and right, and a medal payout port 15 for paying medals is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. At the lowermost part of the lower door 62b, a medal receiving part 16 for storing paid-out medals is provided.

  On the lower front surface of the lower door 62b, on a surface sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R and the medal receiving portion 16 on the upper and lower sides, a waist panel 25 having a design corresponding to a model motif is provided. Installed. The lumbar panel 25 is illuminated by a lumbar panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind.

[Display unit structure]
Subsequently, the structure of the display unit 100 provided in the pachislo machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Display unit 100)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit 100 is provided inside the cabinet 61 behind the upper door 62a. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit 100 is detachably provided on an intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. The intermediate support plate 301 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 61. The display unit 100 is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image, and a screen device C that causes an image to appear by being irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. .

  Here, the projection mapping apparatus is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. Etc.) and an image generated according to the effect information, which is generated based on the shape, enables an advanced and powerful effect.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B includes a projector mechanism B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen that is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and that receives irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 obliquely below and behind. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects light in the direction of the device C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is arranged at a rear part in the cabinet 61. The projector mechanism B2 has a flat base member B22 arranged horizontally. On a lower surface of the base member B22, a lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided. The lens mechanism B21 is disposed so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  Further, on the lower surface of the base member B22, heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided. The heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 are disposed on the right and left sides of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. Each of the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 has a duct for circulating air and a fan for sending out air, and blows air backward to forcibly remove heat generated when generating irradiation light. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, the ventilation holes 21a of the cabinet 61 are arranged in the flow direction of the air in the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24. Thus, the heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 to the outside of the apparatus via the ventilation holes 21a together with the air.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (in the emission direction of irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. are doing. As shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape on the front surface. At each corner of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

  A mirror holder B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed at the center and has a size that does not overlap with the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 abut on both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by a mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front when the upper door 62a is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holder B11, and this screw passes through the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws that pass through the angle adjustment holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the same as those of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341.

  When the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 increases. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is provided between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is pinched. As described above, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33, B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror stoppers B33, B34 is changed by rotating the screw. Thus, the distance between the reflector holding unit B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holder B11 and the mirror mechanism at the positions where the angle adjustment holes B311 and 331, and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2 can be finely adjusted.

  Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11. It is pinched by. Then, a screw inserted from the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 passes through the spring. Thus, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from jumping out of the angle adjustment hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit 100: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes an upper wall portion B12 disposed horizontally, a reflector holding portion B11 disposed in front of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13, B13 disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And The upper wall portion B12 has a front portion projecting forward from the cabinet 61 in FIG. A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a central portion of a front side of the upper wall portion B12 so as to protrude forward, and holds the above-described mirror mechanism B3 in a space formed by the projection so as to be adjustable in angle. .

  Further, the side wall portions B13, B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding from the lower end portion in the horizontal direction. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is set to have a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 61. Have been. On the other hand, when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, the second protruding portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet 61, and is wider than the width of the space behind. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, in each of the side wall portions B13, B13, the width of the second protrusion B131b is formed wider than the width of the first protrusion B131a. Thereby, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet 61.

  On the lower surface side of the projector cover B1, a perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided. The perforated plate B15 is a punched metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.) plate. The plurality of holes B151 are formed substantially uniformly dispersed over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat discharging mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and number of the holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, and a hexagon, and has a hole diameter of about 3 to 5 mm.

  The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from a lower position. As shown in FIG. 12, the perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle portion, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper part B15a is arranged horizontally. The inclined portion B15b is formed by bending obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower portion B15c is formed by being bent horizontally from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

  The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side walls B13, B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from below with the upper part B15a, and to cover from the lower part with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. I have. As shown in FIG. 10, a front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is disposed below the perforated plate B15.

  As will be described in detail later, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a front standby position disposed at an upper position serving as a standby posture for inhibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower position serving as an exposure posture for permitting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture has an inclined posture substantially parallel to and close to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed position, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and air existing in this space portion reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of spaces are formed. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the flow of air into the screen device C and increase the cooling efficiency.

  The perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the line of sight of the player located on the front side is centered in the vertical and horizontal directions of the screen device C. The perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being viewed even when the light irradiation device B exists on the horizontal line of the portion and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line-of-sight position.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. Thereby, the display unit 100 can unite the irradiation light device B and the screen device C and integrally handle them.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 15, the screen housing C10 includes a bottom plate C1 disposed horizontally, a right plate C2 erected on the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left plate C3 erected on the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. Thereby, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side where the player is located and the top side where the irradiation light device B is located. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4, which constitute the screen housing C10, are each independently formed in a predetermined shape, and predetermined functional parts such as a fixed screen mechanism D can be attached. Has been. This makes it possible to share the plate unit of the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4, even if the entire unit of the screen device C cannot be shared. In addition, since it is possible to partially change each plate member, it is possible to easily change specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
Specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape when viewed from above. On the upper surface of the bottom plate C1, a central mounting portion C11 arranged at the center portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction around the central mounting portion C11 are provided. I have. These mounting portions C11, C12, C13 are formed in a concave shape. The center mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so as to be positioned by fitting the lower end of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting part C12 and the left mounting part C13 position the right mobile body base C5 and the left mobile body base C6 by fitting the lower ends of the right mobile body base C5 and the left mobile body base C6, respectively. Mounted as possible.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the front end portion is located below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. As shown in FIG. 5, when the display unit 100 is mounted while being mounted on the intermediate support plate 301 of the cabinet 61, the front side portion C <b> 14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate 301 so that the front side C <b> 14 It is possible to perform rearward positioning. The display unit 100 is screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 61 through the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14, so that the display unit 100 can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet 61. It is possible.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit 100 can be carried by catching a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction is aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from outside.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is installed in the cabinet 61, first, the display unit 100 is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 61 in which the upper door 62a is opened. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet 61 releases the screws of the display unit 100 to the cabinet 61 and removes the screws. Then, the user reaches the inside of the cabinet 61, holds the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit 100 with both hands, and takes out the display unit 100 out of the cabinet 61. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17, for example, the user reaches into the screen device C from one of the operation openings C21 of the removed display unit 100, and rotates the crank gear E21 that is viewed horizontally from the operation opening C21. Thus, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

  In a state in which the upper door 62a is opened, a hand is reached from the front of the opening of the cabinet 61 into the space between the side wall 302 of the cabinet 61 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and is moved from the operation opening C21. By operating the crank gear E21, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit 100 outside the cabinet 61.

  Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed in the right side plate C2. The motor housing C22 houses the drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen casing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the relay board CK is provided on the back surface. The relay board CK allows a plurality of signal lines in the display unit 100 to be assembled and wiring to the outside of the display unit 100 to be performed at one place. The relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4 so as to be disposed in front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61. That is, the relay board CK is disposed in the gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 5, a through hole 303 of an intermediate support plate 301 that supports the display unit 100 is disposed below the relay board CK, and a signal line of the relay board CK is inserted therethrough.

  Accordingly, since the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C, the wiring work is facilitated, and it is not necessary to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the device C is increased.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 18, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged on the lower right side, and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is installed in the cabinet 61, the display unit 100 is first removed from the cabinet 61. Thereafter, the user reaches the inside of the screen device C through the operation opening C41 and rotates the intermediate gear E23 that is viewed in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, thereby easily moving the locked front screen mechanism E1 from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D, E1, F1 will be described later.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen position relation)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is provided rotatably between a front exposure position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set such that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located ahead of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 hides the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. Making it possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, by exposing the fixed screen mechanism D, an image based on the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between a reel exposure position and a reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set such that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is located ahead of the fixed exposure position. Thereby, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1 by setting the reel screen mechanism F1 to cover the fixed screen mechanism D from the front. Making it possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, by exposing the fixed screen mechanism D, it is possible to make the image by the irradiation light appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 located at the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 located at the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is located above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is located behind the fixed screen mechanism D. Thereby, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 are different between the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 so that the overlapping of the operation areas due to the rotation is minimized. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. Thereby, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to a minimum.

  The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is at the standby position. This prevents interference between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 when rotating.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflector D1, a right reflector D2, a left reflector D3, and a lower reflector D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B.

  Note that the fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a reflecting surface at a plurality of different angles with respect to the optical axis of irradiation light, Alternatively, a reflecting portion having a curved or arcuate reflecting surface whose center of curvature is located on the front surface side and continuously has different angles with respect to the optical axis may be provided.

  The front reflection portion D1 has a reflection surface facing the player on the front side and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B disposed in the upper front part of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. Is set to The right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 are joined to the right and left sides of the front-side reflection unit D1, and are arranged symmetrically about the front-side reflection unit D1. The right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflection unit D1. Thereby, the right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 can easily reflect a part of the irradiation light while causing an image by the irradiation light to appear, because the reflection direction of the irradiation light on the reflection surface is easily directed toward the front reflection unit D1. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Also, with respect to the lower surface reflection portion D4, since the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface is more likely to be directed to the front reflection portion D1, a part of the irradiation light is caused to appear in the direction of the front reflection portion D1 while an image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflection surface is set lower than the brightness of each reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected from the reflection surface of the irradiation light is smaller than the amount of light reflected from the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Thereby, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the white blur due to the mixing of light due to the irregular reflection of the reflection units D1 to D4 is prevented. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, it is possible to reduce the reflection of the irradiation light to the front reflection unit D1 in the other reflection units D2, D3, and D4, so that it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image appear strongly in the front reflection unit D1.

  As the lightness, Brightness in the L * a * b * color system (L * a * b * color space) or the L * u * v * color system (L * u * v * color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as other colors can be represented by relative values based on white.

  The brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. There is no particular limitation as long as the brightness is lower than the surface brightness. For example, the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. What is necessary is just to make black the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the paint of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. What added a black pigment to the paint applied to a substrate should just be used.

  In such a paint, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio between the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes: Both a white pigment and a black pigment may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is higher in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than the paint applied to the base materials of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or (About 10 to 20%)). In addition, as a coating material applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, a conventionally known coating material for a screen can be appropriately used, and can be adjusted according to a screen type (for example, a diffusion type or a reflection type). .

  It is to be noted that the black pigment is not contained in the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin used as the material of the base material before the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is formed. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be reduced.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10, such as the surrounding walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4), and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is desirable to lower the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in the. It is desirable that the brightness of those members is lower than the brightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, as for the surrounding wall, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen, so if the brightness is low, Lower is more desirable. That is, the color of the surrounding wall is preferably as close to black as possible.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin flat panel. Thus, the front screen member E11 is configured such that the projection surface E11a is formed in a flat shape, so that an image having no distortion appears when the irradiation light is irradiated.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 that holds the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection screen E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding concave portion E121 is set to have two depths, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support base E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly across both ends in the short direction passing through the center portion.

  As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 abuts and is supported by the step E121a of the peripheral portion and the linear step E121b passing through the center, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. Have been in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion prevents the front screen member E11 from deforming and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to a player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to a player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. On the first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to a game effect is formed three-dimensionally by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are separately formed and then integrated by bonding with an adhesive. As a result, even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support E12, the sink marks are mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent distortion due to sinking of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11.

  The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, but may be any method such as screw fastening.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, an ABS resin or the like) capable of generating sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately employed. it can.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen driving mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen driving mechanism E2 includes a left front screen driving mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end of the front screen mechanism E1, and a right screen connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has an upper end (one end) connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 in FIG. 15 at an intermediate position E22a. This allows the crank member E22 to rotate at the upper end and the lower end (the other end) about the intermediate position E22a as the center of rotation.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a, and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 25, the center line in the upper region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the middle point on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is vertically oriented in the standby posture. Is set to On the other hand, the center line (the straight line passing through the middle position E22a and the middle point at the lower end side of the crank member E22) in the lower region is set so that the lower side is inclined more forward than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in a lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two linear portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b has a surface corresponding to the linear portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 set in parallel with the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two linear portions) substantially matches the member width of the slide member E26, and is set so as to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. The upper end of the slide groove E22b is set such that the slide member E26 abuts on the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 in FIG. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is a line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position. It is set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to a line connecting the center point of E26.

  Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, even if a force acts in a direction for rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the rotation center position is determined in a direction in which all components of the force are applied. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-joint link having zero degrees of freedom with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as a free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pressed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as strong brakes.

  An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 meshes with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. Thus, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. Also, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, a line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b corresponds to the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. Since the rotation trajectory is set so as to be orthogonal to the line connecting the center point of the slide member E26, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22. Accordingly, when the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 starts rotating easily.

  When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b. The intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and a two-joint link having one degree of freedom is formed in which the slide member E26 is a free end movable along the groove wall surface. When the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 provided with the slide groove E22b in which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates around the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, thereby rotating the upper region of the crank member E22. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  In addition, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is in the stop state 0 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, gradually increases, and is intermediate between the standby posture and the exposure posture (FIG. 27). , Gradually decelerates after reaching the maximum speed, and enters the stop state 0 when the exposure posture and the standby posture are attained. Accordingly, the rotation can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the driving mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failure and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

  As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3 so that the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. I have.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 formed of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. And a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end of the screen.

  The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape approximate to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface that is the rotation center side. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position, the pattern on the back surface is made visible to the player in front. On the surface of the reel screen portion F11, a pattern is formed on a peripheral portion, and an inner peripheral region of the peripheral portion is a projection surface. When the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the projection surface can make an image appear by irradiation of irradiation light.

  One end of each of the left and right reel screen supports F12 and F13 is connected to the reel screen F11. On the other hand, the other end portions of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 each have a projection (not shown). The protruding portion protrudes horizontally outside each of the reel screen supporting portions F12 and F13, and is connected to the reel screen driving mechanism F2 to be a rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Production by screen device)
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are executed using the display unit 100 described above. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, by using a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a planar image display and a sense of depth (three-dimensional feeling) are provided. It is possible to execute an effect using a video display having a certain effect and an effect using a curved image display.

  For example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the front screen mechanism E1, by causing the image to appear on the flat projection surface E11a, distortion occurs during irradiation of the irradiation light. A video having no image can be displayed, and an effect using this two-dimensional video can be executed.

  Further, for example, when the screen mechanism for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the fixed screen mechanism D, a plurality of reflectors of the fixed screen mechanism D provide a sense of depth (three-dimensional feeling). A video with a certain depth can be caused to appear, and an effect using the video with a sense of depth can be executed.

  Further, for example, when the screen mechanism for displaying an image by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the reel screen mechanism F1, by causing the image to appear on the reel screen unit F11 made of a curved flat plate, A curved image can be displayed, and an effect using the curved image can be executed.

[Display Example of First Sub Display Device]
Subsequently, a display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a part of the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201. As shown in FIG. 29, a plurality of display screens including a top screen 211, a menu screen 212, and game information screens 213, 214, 215 are displayed on the first sub display device 201. The plurality of display screens are switched according to the operation of the player received via the touch sensor 201a.

  The top screen 211 is an initial screen among the display screens displayed on the first sub display device 201, and displays a menu button 211a and a summary game history 211b. The menu button 211a is an operation button for calling the menu screen 212 when operated (tapped) by the player. The summary game history 211b displays a part of the game history in the pachislot machine 1 (summary game history). In the present embodiment, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachislot machine 1 are displayed as the summary game history.

  The menu screen 212 is a menu of a display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201, and includes a return button 212a, a registration button 212b, an explanation button 212c, an array payout button 212d, a reach eye button 212e, and a WEB button. A site button 212f and a volume button 212g are displayed. The return button 212a is an operation button for calling the top screen 211 when operated by the player. The registration button 212b to the volume button 212g are operation buttons for calling a corresponding display screen when operated by the player.

  For example, when the registration button 212b is operated by a player, a registration screen (not shown) for registering a player who is playing a game is called. In recent pachislot machines, a service for registering a player for each model and managing various information such as the achievement status of a predetermined mission based on the game history of the player so far is widely performed. . The registration screen called by the registration button 212b is a display screen for registering a player when receiving the provision of this service.

  When the explanation button 212c is operated by the player, an explanation screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. The contents described on the explanation screen include, for example, explanations about the specifications of the pachislot machine 1 such as a bonus winning probability and an ART winning probability for each set value, and introduction of characters appearing in the performance of the pachislot machine 1.

  When the player operates the array payout button 212d, an array payout screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. On the arrangement payout screen, for example, the correspondence (payout table) between the combination of the symbols determined to be a winning in the pachislot machine 1 and the privilege when the winning is determined, and the symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R A row (reel arrangement) and the like are displayed.

  When the reach button 212e is operated by the player, a reach screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. The reach screen on the pachislot machine 1 is displayed on the reach screen. Note that the reach eye is a combination of symbols to which a special privilege is given by being displayed along the activated line. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach eye lip shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. The combination of symbols corresponds. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of the reach lip symbols is displayed along the activated line, then, the player has an advantageous state (for example, bonus state, normal ART or CT (FIG. 33)). See))).

  When the WEB site button 212f is operated by the player, a WEB introduction screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. On the WEB introduction screen, a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code (registered trademark)) indicating a URL of an arbitrary WEB site such as a special WEB site provided for each type of the pachislot machine 1 or a WEB site of a manufacturer of the pachislot machine 1 is displayed. Is displayed. The player can access the corresponding WEB site by reading the two-dimensional code displayed on the WEB introduction screen with a mobile phone or the like.

  When the volume button 212g is operated by the player, a volume adjustment screen (not shown) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 9L and 9R is called. The player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of the pachislo machine 1 via the volume adjustment screen.

  Here, since the first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs the effect, the first sub-display device 201 can be controlled separately from the display unit 100, and can be controlled during the game (that is, when the effect is performed on the display unit 100). Even in the case of (medium), the display of the first sub-display device 201 can be switched. From the viewpoint of the player, for example, there is a case where the player wants to know a character appearing in the effect on the display unit 100. In such a case, by operating the explanation button 212c and calling the explanation screen, the relationship between the characters can be determined. Can be grasped during the game. From the viewpoint of the player, there is a case where the player wants to grasp a symbol which should be used as a guide to win the rare role during the rotation of the reel when the so-called rare role is won. In such a case, the array payout button 212d By operating the button to call the arrangement payout screen, the reel arrangement can be grasped.

  The game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are display screens that display detailed game histories including a summary game history displayed on the top screen of the game histories of the pachislot machine 1. The game information screen 213 displays a return button 213a, a menu button 213b, a previous button 213c, a next button 213d, and a game history 213e. The return button 213a and the menu button 213b are operation buttons for calling the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. Further, the previous button 213c and the next button 213d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen by being operated by the player. When the front button 213c is operated, the game information screen 213 switches from the game information screen to the game information screen. When the display screen is switched to 215 and the next button 213d is operated, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 213 to the game information screen 214. The game history 213e displays the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (the number of games) in the pachislot machine 1.

  The game information screen 214 displays a return button 214a, a menu button 214b, a previous button 214c, a next button 214d, and a game history 214e. The return button 214a and the menu button 214b are operation buttons for calling the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, when operated by the player. The previous button 214c and the next button 214d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order when operated by the player. Further, the game history 214e displays the number of times that the pachislot machine 1 has entered and succeeded in the CZ (chance zone). As described later, in the present embodiment, since the CZ includes CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3, the number of inrushes and the number of successes of CZ1 to CZ1 are displayed in the game history 214e.

  The game information screen 215 displays a return button 215a, a menu button 215b, a previous button 215c, a next button 215d, and a game history 215e. The return button 215a and the menu button 215b are operation buttons that, when operated by the player, call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively. Further, the previous button 215c and the next button 215d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. Further, the game history 215e displays the number of wins and the probability of winning so-called small wins in the pachislot machine 1 (fraction with a numerator of 1).

  The display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201 may be switched based on a tap operation on an operation button displayed on each display screen, or may be switched based on a swipe operation on the display screen. It may be.

[Configuration of circuit included in pachislot machine]
This is the end of the description of the structure of the pachislot machine 1. Next, a configuration of a circuit included in the pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board 71, a sub control board 72, an external centralized terminal plate 73 electrically connected to these, and a peripheral device (actuator).

<Main control board>
FIG. 30 shows an electric configuration mainly including a main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 in the present embodiment.

(Microcomputer)
The main control board 71 mainly includes the microcomputer 30 installed on a circuit board. The microcomputer 30 includes a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 31, a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 32, and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 33.

  The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub-control board 72, and the like. The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

(Such as a random number generator)
The main CPU 31 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate a clock pulse.

  The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts at least one value from the generated random numbers according to the application.

(Peripheral devices and circuits)
As peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 30, there are stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R and a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper) 40. The input / output port of the microcomputer 30 includes a motor drive circuit 39, a hopper drive circuit 41, a reel position detection circuit 50, a payout completion signal circuit 51, an external centralized terminal board 73, Various circuits such as a door relay board 74 and various boards are connected.

  The motor drive circuit 39 constitutes symbol variation means and controls the drive of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. That is, the motor drive circuit 39 changes the symbol displayed on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R by rotating each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the establishment of the predetermined start condition.

  The reel position detection circuit 50 detects a reel index indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation according to the respective reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have made one rotation.

  The stepping motors 49L, 49C, and 49R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is transmitted to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time one pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate at a fixed angle.

  After detecting the reel index, the main CPU 31 counts the number of times a pulse has been output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Thus, the main CPU 31 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

  Next, management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 33. The symbol counter provided in the main RAM 33 is incremented by one each time the pulse counter outputs a predetermined number of pulses required for rotation of one symbol. The symbol counter is provided for each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 50.

  That is, in this embodiment, the main CPU 31 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

  The hopper drive circuit 41 controls the operation of the hopper 40. The payout completion signal circuit 51 manages the medal detection performed by the medal detecting unit 40S provided in the hopper 40, and checks whether or not the number of medals paid out from the hopper 40 reaches the number of payouts. .

(External concentrated terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 73 receives signals such as the number of medals inserted / paid out from the main control board 71, the number of games, information on the presence / absence of bonus operation, and displays these signals as the number of games and the number of bonus operations. Output to an external display or a host computer of a game arcade. The external display is installed, for example, above the pachislot machine 1, and updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and the bonus operation, or notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

  Here, the medal insertion signal is a signal that enables recognition of medal insertion, and is output when the start lever 6 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that enables recognition of medal payout or replay, and is output at the time of payout (including credit storage) or at the time of replay operation.

(Door relay board)
The door relay board 74 is a board that relays wiring between the main control board 71 and various buttons and switches and the information display 14. The door relay board 74 is connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 75. Note that the door relay board 74 is connected so as to be able to transmit information only to the sub relay board 75, and the information is not transmitted from the sub relay board 75. As a result, one-way communication between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 is possible in which information can be transmitted only from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72.

  A start switch 6S, a stop switch 7S, a medal sensor 42S, a MAX bet switch 11S, a 1-bet switch (not shown), and a settlement switch 13S are connected to the door relay board 74.

  The start switch 6S constitutes a start operation detecting means, and detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation). The stop switch 7S constitutes a stop operation detecting means, and detects that each of the three stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The medal sensor 42S detects that the medal accepted by the medal slot 22 has passed through the selector. The MAX bet switch 11S detects that the MAX bet button 11 has been pressed by the player. The 1-bet switch detects that the 1-bet button has been pressed by the player. The main CPU 31 activates the activated line based on the detection result of the medal sensor 42S or the MAX bet switch 11S and the 1-bet switch. The settlement switch 13S detects that the settlement button 13 has been pressed by the player.

  Further, the door relay board 74 is provided inside each of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R, and the stop button internal LEDs 107L, 107C, 107R for displaying the reception state thereof, and the number of medals and an advantageous stop operation are uniquely defined. And an information display 14 (instruction monitor) for notifying the user.

<Sub-control board>
FIG. 31 shows an electrical configuration mainly of the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the main control board 71, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control board 71.

  The sub-control board 72 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub-CPU) 81, a ROM cartridge board 82, a RAM (hereinafter, sub-RAM) 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86.

  The sub CPU 81 controls output of video, sound, and light in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82 in response to a command transmitted from the main control substrate 71. Note that the ROM cartridge substrate 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 71, the effect random number value is extracted to determine the effect contents (effect data), An effect registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the display unit 100 based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling light output by various LEDs 101, a speaker 9L, A program such as a voice control task for controlling sound output by 9R is included.

  The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effect contents, a storage area for storing animation data relating to video creation, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects. And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like.

  The display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201, and the second sub-display device 202 are connected to the sub-control board 72 via a predetermined relay board, as shown in FIGS. For example, the sub-control board 72 connects the accessory relay board (not shown) to the display unit 100, and also connects the first sub-display 201 and the second sub-display via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). 202. The display unit 100, the first sub display device 201, and the second sub display device 202 are individually controlled under the control of the sub control board 72.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30, a sub relay board 75 is provided between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, and relays a wiring connecting the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. The sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 to various peripheral devices by relaying wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and a plurality of boards disposed around the sub-control board 72. . For example, the sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 to the various LEDs 101, the reel illuminator 102, and the bet button LED 103 via an LED board (not shown). The sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and the speakers 9L and 9R via a sound I / O board (not shown) and a sub-control board via a touch sensor relay board (not shown). 72 and the touch sensor 201a are connected.

[Transition flow of gaming state of pachislot machine]
Next, a game state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 31) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and a transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

<Basic game state transition flow>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of winning / operation of a bonus, the type of an internal winning combination related to replay, and the winning probability. As shown in FIG. 32, the main control board 71 distinguishes a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of a bonus (F_BB1, 2). Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated, and the state between the flags is a state in which the bonus is won and the bonus is not activated. Is a state in which the bonus is activated.

  The presence or absence of a bonus is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33, and the presence or absence of the bonus is determined by a game state flag provided in the main RAM 33. It is managed based on data stored in a storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination relating to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, the main control board 71 provides six types of states from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state in which the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay and the winning probability thereof are different from each other. Note that the RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the combination relating to replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 gaming state is where the combination relating to replay is the internal winning combination. Is a game state in which the probability determined as is the medium probability. In addition, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that a combination relating to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high.

  These RT0 game state to RT5 game state are managed based on data stored in a game state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. More specifically, the pachislot machine 1 has five flags, RT1 gaming state flag to RT5 gaming state flag, and manages the on / off state of these flags in the main RAM 33 to manage the RT gaming state. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies an RT gaming state according to the ON RT gaming state flag as a current RT gaming state. When all the RT gaming state flags are off, the main control board 71 specifies that the current RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 32, when the combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the (1) bonus non-winning state, the main control board 71 switches the game from the bonus non-winning state to the state between the flags. Transition state. Then, when the combination related to the bonus is won in the (2) inter-flag state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

  Further, the main control board 71 terminates the bonus state and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state when medals exceeding a specified number (216) are paid out in the (3) bonus state. In this RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state after the (4) 20 games have elapsed, and (5) displays a bell spill before the 20 games have elapsed. Then, the game state is shifted from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game state. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when the (5) bell spilling is displayed.

  When the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the (6) RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 transitions the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and (7) displays the RT4 transition lip in the RT3 gaming state. Then, the game state is shifted from the RT3 game state to the RT4 game state. In addition, when the bell spilling eye or the RT2 transition lip is displayed in the (8) RT3 game state, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the RT3 game state to the RT2 game state, and similarly, the bell in the RT4 game state. When the spilled eye or the RT2 shift lip is displayed, the game state is shifted from the RT4 game state to the RT2 game state.

  Here, the spilled bell is determined for each type of the pressing order bell when the pressing order bells (F_3 optional bell_1st, F_3 optional bell_2nd, F_3 optional bell_3rd) described later are determined as the internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. In addition, when the maintenance lip (F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, F_maintenance lip_3rd), which will be described later, is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT2 transition lip is not performed in the pressing order determined for each type of maintenance lip. This is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, when the RT3 lip (described later) (F_RT3 lip — 1st, F_RT3 lip — 213, F_RT3 lip — 231 and F_RT3 lip — 3rd) is determined as an internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of RT3 lip. This is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, when the RT4 transition lip is determined as an internal winning combination, an RT4 lip described later (F_RT4 lip — 123, F_RT4 lip — 132, F_RT4 lip — 2nd, F_RT4 lip — 3rd) is determined in the pressing order determined for each type of RT4 lip. This is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Transition flow of game state regarding presence / absence of notification>
As described above, the pachislo machine 1 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of winning / operation of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability, while notifying the stopping operation advantageous to the player. The game state is managed based on whether or not to play. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of the notification.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 distinguishes between the general gaming state and the ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of the notification. The general gaming state is a gaming state (non-ART) in which the details of a stop operation advantageous to the player are not reported, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the ART gaming state is a gaming state in which a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is an advantageous gaming state for the player. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player performs a game from the general game state (while sandwiching the bonus state according to the situation) so as to shift to the ART game state which is advantageous to the player. .

  The general gaming state is a gaming state in which the ART is not won among the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 33, the normal game state is composed of a normal game state and a CZ (chance zone). The normal gaming state and the CZ are gaming states in which the transition destination gaming state is different from each other. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal gaming state shifts to the CZ, and the CZ shifts to the ART gaming state. Is performed.

  The normal game state is the most disadvantageous game state in the pachislot machine 1, and there is a possibility that the normal game state may shift to CZ as shown in FIG. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, the lottery for shifting to the CZ is performed. (A) When this shifting lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the CZ.

  The CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) having a high degree of expectation for shifting to the ART gaming state. As shown in FIG. 33, the CZ may shift to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, in the CZ, the transition lottery to the ART is performed. (B) When the transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 transitions the game state from the CZ to the normal game state, and (C) When the transfer lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) via the preparation for ART.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which the ART is won among the RT4 gaming states, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after the ART winning. As shown in FIG. 32, since the RT4 gaming state shifts from the RT0 to RT2 gaming states via the RT3 gaming state, the ART gaming state does not immediately start even after the ART winning. Absent. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, ART preparation is performed until a transition to the RT4 gaming state after the ART is won, and a stop operation required to transition to the RT4 gaming state during the ART preparation is notified.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which the ART is won among the RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 33, the ART gaming state is generally constituted by ART and CT. The normal ART and the CT are gaming states in which the gaming properties are different from each other. The normal ART is a stop operation that is advantageous to the player during a predetermined number of games (for example, to display a combination of symbols with a large number of paid-out medals). , And a stop operation necessary to maintain the RT4 gaming state), and the CT notifies the player of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player and adds an additional ART period to the normal ART. This is a game state that functions as a chance zone. During the CT, the game is played without consuming the duration of the normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility that a transition from the normal ART to the CT or the general game state is made. Specifically, in the normal ART, a transition lottery to CT is performed. (D) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 transitions the game state from the normal ART to CT. In the normal ART, the duration is managed, and (E) when the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal ART to the normal game state (normal game state or CZ). The method of managing the duration of the normal ART is arbitrary, but the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment manages the duration according to the number of games. Of course, instead of the number of games, the duration may be managed based on the number of medals paid out during the normal ART or the difference between the medals. The number of times may be used to manage the duration.

  As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility that a transition from CT to normal ART is made. Specifically, the duration of the CT is managed, and (F) when the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CT to the normal ART. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CT is managed by the duration of one set of eight games, which will be described in detail later (see FIG. 63).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility that a transition from the normal gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ) and the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, (2) when a combination related to a bonus is won in the general gaming state and the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 changes the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state. Migrate.

  In the bonus state, a transition lottery to the ART is performed. (G) When the transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 transitions the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). (However, if the state has shifted from the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state, the main control board 71 will switch from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) even if the lottery is not won. )). Further, when the (H) shift lottery during the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state ends, the game state shifts to the RT1 game state. Therefore, when shifting the game state from the bonus state to the ART game state, the main control board 71 determines that the ART is being prepared. The game state is shifted to the ART game state via the terminal.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Symbol arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34 represents, by data, an arrangement of symbols arranged on each surface of the left reel 3L, the center reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions “0” to “19” and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

  The symbol positions “0” to “19” indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction on each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The pattern types are "white 7", "blue 7", "chile top 1", "chile top 2", "chile bottom", "replay", "hat", "cactus 1", "cactus 2". And "Cactus 3".

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34 allocates a symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (a symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) to the symbol position “0” and the reel 3L. , 3C, and 3R, in the order in which the symbols move in the rotation direction, the symbol positions “0” to “19” are assigned to each of the 20 symbols.

  Thus, by using the middle of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Symbol code table>
As shown in FIG. 34, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and is distinguished by 1-byte (8-bit) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 34 indicates codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are "white 7", "blue 7", "chile top 1", "chile top 2", "chile bottom", "replay", "hat" as described above. , "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3".

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the “white 7” symbol (symbol code 1). “00000010” is assigned as data to the “blue 7” symbol (symbol code 2). “00000011” is assigned as data to the “Chile on 1” symbol (symbol code 3).

  Similarly, for each of the symbols (symbol code 4 to 10) of “Chile upper 2”, “Chile lower”, “Replay”, “Hat”, “Cactus 1”, “Cactus 2” and “Cactus 3” , “000010010” to “00000010” are assigned as data.

<Symbol combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table includes a symbol combination (combination) determined in advance according to the type of privilege, data to be stored in the main RAM 33 when the symbol combination is displayed, and a symbol combination when the symbol combination is displayed. (The number of medals to be paid out).

  In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line matches the symbol combination (combination) specified in the symbol combination table, it is determined that the winning. Then, when it is determined that a winning is achieved, a bonus such as a payout of a medal, an operation of a replay (replay), and an operation of a bonus game (continuous differential of the accessory) is given to the player. When the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, the result is a so-called "missing". That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the combination of symbols of “losing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the "losing" item may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define the "losing".

  In the data column in the symbol combination table, information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the activated line is defined. Specifically, in the data column, a “storage area” in which data of a corresponding symbol combination is stored, and a “data (bit corresponding to the symbol combination in 1-byte data) stored in the storage area”. Data for designating). In the present embodiment, the combination of each symbol is determined by using 22 one-byte storage areas. For example, “C_BB1” shown in FIG. 35 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of storage area 0.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the activated line when each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, a combination name is defined according to the role of the combination and the type of the symbol constituting the combination.

  The payout number specified in the symbol combination table specifies the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 37, if the combination name “C_9 A_01” is displayed, nine medals will be paid out.

  The content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination. Referring to FIG. 35, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are combinations of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 32). ).

  Further, the combination names “R_RT transition point A_01” to “R_RT transition point B_02” are bell-spilled eyes. When the bell spilled eyes are displayed along the activated line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

  The combination names “C_maintenance lip A_01” to “C_maintenance lip G_01” are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which “replay-replay-replay” is displayed on any of the three lines, that is, the bottom line, the top line, and the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4. When the replay is displayed along the activated line, a replay operation is performed.

  The combination names “C_RT2 lip A_01” and “C_RT2 lip A_02” are RT2 transition lip. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which “replay-replay-replay” is displayed on the cross-up line displayed on the display window 4. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the activated line, the replay operation is performed, and the RT game state transitions to the RT2 game state (see FIG. 32).

  The combination name “C_RT3 lip — 01” is an RT3 transition lip. The RT3 transition lip is a symbol combination in which “replay-replay-replay” is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 shift lip is displayed along the activated line, the replay operation is performed, and the RT game state shifts to the RT3 game state (see FIG. 32).

  The combination names “C_RT4 lip A_01” to “C_RT4 lip D_02” are RT4 transition lip. When the RT4 shift lip is displayed along the activated line, the replay operation is performed, and the RT game state shifts to the RT4 game state (see FIG. 32).

  Further, the combination names “C_Chililip A_01” to “C_1 certain Chililip D_01” are Chililip. The chili lip is a combination of symbols in which the chile symbol is displayed on the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, the symbol "Chile upper 1" and the symbol "Chile lower" are continuously arranged on each reel. The Chile symbol is a name when the symbol “Chile upper 1” and the symbol “Chile lower” are regarded as one symbol. When the chili lip is displayed along the activated line, a replay operation is performed.

  The combination name “C_Chililip A_01” is a combination of symbols in which Chile symbols are displayed on only one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Sometimes referred to as "simple lip". The combination names “C_Chililip B_01” and “C_Chililip C_01” in Chililip are combinations of symbols in which Chile symbols are displayed on two of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Yes, it may be referred to below as "dual chili lip". Further, among the chili lip, the combination names “C_Chili lip D_01” to “C_1 sure chili lip D_01” are combinations of symbols in which the Chile symbol is displayed on all of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed on the display window 4 (or the combination of the symbols). This is a symbol combination displayed when a stop operation for displaying a symbol combination has failed (a so-called mispressing error), and may be hereinafter referred to as "triple lip".

  Also, the combination names “C_reach lip A_01” to “C_reach lip P_02” are reach lip. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye and is a combination of symbols in which a special symbol combination is displayed on the display window 4L. For example, the combination name “C_reach-eye lip A_01” is a combination of symbols in which “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed along the top line. When the reach lip is displayed along the activated line, the replay operation is performed.

  The combination names “C_RB combination A_01” to “C_RB combination G_02” are the 9th out of the BBs. When the 9th out of BB is displayed along the activated line, 9 medals are paid out. Of the nine BB rolls, the combination of symbols excluding the combination names “C_RB combination C_01” and “C_RB combination C_02” is indicated by 7 symbols (symbols) on any of the five lines displayed in the display window 4. A combination of three white “white 7” or three blue “blue” symbols (or a symbol combination displayed when a stop operation for displaying the symbol combination has failed); Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "7 out of BB". On the other hand, the combination names “C_RB combination C_01” and “C_RB combination C_02” are combinations of symbols in which two 7 symbols are displayed side by side on any of the five lines. May be called.

  The combination names “C_9 sheets A_01” to “C_9 sheets H_04” are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which “hat-hat-hat” is displayed on any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When the bell is displayed along the activated line, nine medals are paid out.

  In addition, the combination names “C_1st_A_01” to “C_2nd_B_04” are the first appearance. When the first roll is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out. In addition, the combination names “C_SP1 — 01” and “C_SP2 — 01” are determined results. When the determined result is displayed along the activated line, one medal is paid out.

  The combination names “C_3 sheets A_01” to “C_3 sheets F_01” are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the activated line, three medals are paid out. Further, the combination names “C_weak 2 sheets A_01” to “C_weak 2 sheets B_03” are weak cherries, and the combination names “C_strong 2 sheets A_01” to “C_strong 2 sheets C_09” are strong cherries. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is displayed along the activated line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, an internal lottery table referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines information of a lottery value corresponding to each combination. FIG. 39 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 game state to the RT4 game state, and FIG. 40 is an internal lottery table referred to in the RT5 game state or the bonus state.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0-65535” is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value according to each combination, and whether or not the subtraction result is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred.

  Therefore, the greater the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the role assigned to this is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

  In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination change according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 39, it can be seen that the type of winning combination and the winning probability differ according to the replay determined as the internal winning combination in each gaming state. As the most characteristic point, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “F_Chili lip (No. 25)” to “F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)” are internally won in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state without being determined as a winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1, during the RT4 game state, when “F_Chililip (No. 25)” to “F_reach-eye lip D (No. 31)” is determined as the internal winning combination, specific control (described later) This flag conversion will be described later.

  Note that, even in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, although the “F_reach eye lip A to D” may be determined as an internal winning combination together with “F_BB1,2” (No. 3 to 6, No. 15 to 18) and “F_reach eye lip A to D” are not independently determined as the internal winning combination. Therefore, when the “F_reach eye lip A to D” is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT0 game state to the RT3 game state (from the player's point of view, the symbol combination corresponding to the “F_reach eye lip A to D” If it is displayed), the combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.

  In the RT5 gaming state, which is an inter-flag state, the combination relating to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination as described above. For this reason, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 gaming state shown in FIG. 40, the role related to the carried-over bonus is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combinations and symbol combinations>
FIGS. 41 to 46 are comparison tables each showing a correspondence relationship between a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on an active line in each internal winning combination when each winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the activated line in the combination determined as the internal winning combination.

  In the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the game state, and when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 has the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence tables shown in FIGS. 42 to 48, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when a winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination are listed. Even a combination of symbols with a symbol may not be displayed.

  That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the stop control (for example, a symbol to be preferentially drawn in) is made different according to a combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed or a current game state. Even a combination of symbols with a mark may not be displayed. Accordingly, FIGS. 47 and 48 show the correspondence between the combination of the combination and the combination of the symbols actually stopped and displayed.

<Correspondence between winning combinations during non-flag and combinations of symbols stopped and displayed>
FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between a winning combination in a gaming state excluding an inter-flag state and a combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed (some combinations are omitted). In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of combinations, a combination of symbols displayed according to the order of the stop operation (the order of pressing) is a “pushing sequence combination”. The symbol combination associated with “push order correct answer” in FIG. 47 is a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the push order, and corresponds to “push order incorrect answer”. The attached symbol combination is a symbol combination disadvantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying a stop operation that is advantageous for the player, the correct pressing order is notified, and as a result, a combination of symbols associated with the “push order correct answer” is displayed. It should be noted that even in the ART gaming state, the push order in which the answer is incorrect may be reported, but will be described later in detail.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the pressing order indicates the pressing order that is the correct answer. Specifically, the suffix “1st” of the role name means that the correct pressing order is the first stop operation with respect to the left reel 3L, and the suffix “2nd” of the role name is The correct pushing order means that the first stop operation is for the middle reel 3C, and the suffix “3rd” of the role name indicates that the correct pushing order is the first stop operation for the right reel. It means that it is for 3R. In addition, the end “123” of the role name means that the correct push order is “left, middle, right”, and the end “132” of the role name has the correct push order “left”. , Right, middle ", and the suffix" 213 "of the role name means that the correct pushing order is" middle, left, right ", and the suffix" 231 "of the role name. Means that the correct pushing order is “left, right, middle”.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the combination “F_Chililip” is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, FIG. 41 of the chililip (see FIG. 35). 46 are displayed along the active line, and if the pressing order is not correct, the replay (see FIG. 35) will be displayed in FIGS. Any of the combinations of the indicated displayable symbols is displayed along the activated line. In addition, referring to FIG. 41 to FIG. 46, the role “F_Chililip” cannot display the triple chililip (“C_Chililip D_01” to “C_1 sure Chirilip D_01”), and the single chililip or the double chililip (“C_Chililip”) A_01, C_Chililip B_01, and C_Chililip C_01) can be displayed. That is, the role “F_Chirilip” is a role that cannot display the triple Chirilip.

  In addition, the combination of the symbols “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the order of pressing, and if the order of pressing is correct, the combination of Chill Lip (see FIG. 35) Any of the displayable combinations of the symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the activated line, and when the pressing order is not correct, the replay (see FIG. 35) shown in FIGS. Any of the combinations of symbols that can be displayed as shown at 46 are displayed along the activated line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 41 to 46, it can be seen that the combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Chill Chill Lip” can display triple Chill Lip. In other words, the combination “F_Sure Chilllip” and “F_1 ChillClip” are the roles that can display the triple Chilllip.

  Further, the combination of the symbols “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the reach lip ( 35 and 36), any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not correct, a replay (FIG. 35) are displayed along the activated line.

  Note that the order of pressing the correct answers in the roles “F_Chililip”, “F_ChochiRilip”, “F_1ChochiRilip”, and the roles “F_Reach-Lip-A” to “F_Reach-RipD” may be arbitrary. In the embodiment, the pressing order in which the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L is the correct pressing order. Therefore, for example, in a game in which the winning combination “F_Reach Rep A” is determined as an internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach Rip is displayed. Will be done.

  Regarding the combination of “F_maintenance lip A” and “F_maintenance lip B”, any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 in the replays (see FIG. 35) regardless of the pressing order is an effective line. Is displayed along. In addition, the combination of the symbols "F_maintenance lip_1st" to "F_maintenance lip_3rd" is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, replay (see FIG. 35). If any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not correct, the RT2 transition lip (see FIG. 35) One of the combinations of symbols that can be displayed as shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the activated line.

  In addition, the combination of symbols “F_RT3 lip — 1st” to “F_RT3 lip — 3rd” is a combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition lip (see FIG. 35). Are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not the correct answer, any of the combinations of the displayable patterns shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 in the replay (see FIG. 35) is displayed as the activated line. Displayed along.

  In addition, the combination of symbols “F_RT4 lip — 123” to “F_RT4 lip — 3rd” is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT4 shift lip (see FIG. 35). Are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not the correct answer, any of the combinations of the displayable patterns shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 in the replay (see FIG. 35) is displayed as the activated line. Displayed along.

  In addition, the combination of the symbols “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 37) Are displayed along the activated line, and if the pressing order is not correct, a bell spilled eye (see FIG. 35) or a first roll (see FIGS. 37 and 38) is displayed.

  Regarding the combination “F_common bell”, any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 among the bells (see FIG. 37) regardless of the pressing order is displayed along the activated line. Regarding the combination of “F_Sabo 1” and “F_Sabo 2”, any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the cactus (see FIG. 38) regardless of the pushing order is along the activated line. Is displayed.

  Regarding the combination "weak chile", any of the combinations of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 among the weak cherries (see FIG. 38) regardless of the pressing order is displayed along the activated line. Regarding the role “F_Strong Chile 1” and “F_Strong Chile 2”, any of the combinations of the symbols that can be displayed among the strong cherries (see FIG. 38) shown in FIGS. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence between winning combinations between flags and combinations of symbols that are stopped and displayed>
FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of symbols stopped and displayed (a part of the combination is omitted). In particular, BB (“C_BB1” during the inter-flag state) "C_BB2") can be displayed. 48, "○" indicates that BB can be displayed, and "x" indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

  If the BB cannot be displayed, a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the combination relating to the bonus determined as the internal winning combination is displayed. The combination of symbols displayed according to the combination other than the combination relating to the bonus is as shown in FIG. For example, in the combination “F_BB1 + F_Chililip”, the BB cannot be displayed, and the combination of the symbols in the correspondence shown in the combination “F_Chililip” in FIG. 47 is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, only the symbol combinations displayed when the push order is correct as shown in FIG. 47 may be displayed, or only the symbol combinations displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed. It may be.

  For example, in the combination "F_BB1 + F_3 alternative bell_1st", since the BB cannot be displayed, the symbol combination of the correspondence shown in the combination "F_3 alternative bell_1st" in FIG. 47 is displayed. In this case, In this case, only the bell displayed when the pressing order is correct may be displayed, and the spilled bell or the first page displayed when the pressing order is incorrect may not be displayed. In the case of the combination "F_BB1 + F_RT3 lip_1st", only the replay displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition lip displayed when the push order is correct may not be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 48, in the flag-to-flag state, if any of the combination related to the bonus and any of “losing”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, and “F_special 3” is determined as the internal winning combination, BB can be displayed.

<Abbreviation of winning combination>
The correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed has been described above. Next, a data table used when performing various lotteries in a general gaming state, an ART gaming state, and the like will be described. In the following, a winning combination used when referring to the data table is abbreviated. Before the description, the abbreviation of the winning combination will be described. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating abbreviations of winning combinations.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the following, the roles “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are referred to as a role “BB”, and the roles “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” are referred to as a role “push order bell”. The role “F_Common Bell” calls the role “Common Bell”, the roles “F_Sabo1” and “F_Sabo2” call the role “Cactus”, the role “F_Low Chile” calls the role “Low Cherry”, and the role “F_Strong” Chile 1 and F_Strong Chile 2 are called the role “Strong Cherry”.

  Further, the winning combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Chill Chill Lip” are called a combination “Triple Chill Lip” when the flag conversion lottery is won, and are called “Replay” when the flag conversion lottery is not won. Similarly, the winning combination “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is called a “reach eye rip” when the flag conversion lottery is won, and is called a “replay” when the flag conversion lottery is not won.

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion lottery will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, any one of the combinations “F_Clip Clip”, “F_1 Clip Clip”, “F_Reach-Lip A” to “F_Reach-Rip D” during the RT4 gaming state is independently used as the internal winning combination. When determined, a flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, in the pachislot machine 1, when this flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege (for example, an increase in the number of ART games or CT winning) is given.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the combination of the symbol “F_Sure Chill Lip” and the symbol “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” are displayed when the push order is correct, and the combination of the symbols “Replay” when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the case of the pachislot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination of "F_Sure Chill Lip" and "F_1 Chill Chill Lip" is treated as the role of "3 Chill Chill Lip", and information for displaying the symbol combination of "3 Chill Chill Lip". (For example, push forward to aim at the Chilean pattern). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combination of “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” is treated as the role “Replay”, and information for displaying a combination of symbols of “Replay” is notified (for example, , A push order other than the forward push is notified).

  Similarly, the combination of the symbols of “R_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye-lip” is displayed when the push order is correct, and the symbol combination of “replay” is displayed when the push-order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination of “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is treated as the role of “reach-eye lip”, and the combination of the symbols of “reach-eye lip” is used. The information to be displayed is notified (for example, the symbol "white 7" is aimed at by sequentially pushing). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combination of “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is treated as the role “replay”, and information for displaying the symbol combination of “replay”. Notify.

  By performing a stop operation in accordance with this notification, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a combination of symbols of "triple lip" or "reach eye lip" is displayed, and a special privilege is given. According to the pachislot machine 1, a special privilege is given in accordance with the winning of the flag conversion lottery, but from the player, the special privilege is displayed by displaying the symbol combination of "triple chili lip". You will feel that it has been granted.

  In order to enhance the playability of the pachislot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of the symbols to which the privilege is given is different depending on the state, rather than being constant. Since the stop control (combination of displayed symbols) differs depending on the type of the internal winning combination, as a method of changing the appearance frequency of the combination of the symbols to which the privilege is given according to the state, the winning probability of the combination is made different. A technique is also conceivable (in the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of a winning combination can be varied according to the presence or absence of a bonus or the RT gaming state. For example, only the RT4 gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state). Instead, a method of providing another game state such as an RT6 game state or an RT7 game state is also conceivable). However, the opportunity to change the winning probability of the winning combination (the opportunity to transition to the RT gaming state) is limited, and this method lacks flexibility.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the bonus is determined by performing flag conversion random determination and notification based on the result of the random determination in addition to the internal random determination for determining the internal winning combination without changing the winning probability of the winning combination. The appearance frequency of a given combination of symbols can be flexibly changed according to the state. In other words, in the state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, the appearance frequency of the symbol combination to which the benefit is given can be increased. On the contrary, in the state where it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of the symbols to which the benefit is given is Can be reduced in appearance frequency.

  Note that, in the following, the winning of the flag conversion lottery when the combination of “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination is described as “3 consecutive combinations of the roles“ F_Sure Chill Lip ”and“ F_1 Sure Chill Lip ”. In some cases, it is referred to as converting to "Chili lip" (or simply converting to "triple lip"), and when the role "F_reach-eye lip A" to "F_reach-eye lip D" is determined as an internal winning combination Winning the flag conversion lottery is referred to as converting the combination of “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” to “reach eye lip” (or simply converting it to “reach eye lip”). There is.

[Flow of game during general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 50, a description will be given of the flow of the game in the general game state. The pachislot machine 1 shifts from the normal game state (non-ART) to the ART game state by shifting from the normal game state of the normal game state to the CZ of the general game state and then shifting from the CZ of the general game state to the ART game state. Is performed (see FIG. 33). FIG. 50 (A) is a diagram showing a flow of a game when shifting from the normal game state in the general game state to the CZ in the general game state.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (A), the normal gaming state has a low probability state and a high probability state as CZ lottery states. The low-probability state and the high-probability state are states in which the degrees of expectation of winning the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state are different from each other. The low-probability state is difficult to win the CZ lottery, and the high-probability state is the CZ lottery. It is easy to do. When the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to CZ (see FIG. 33).

  The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of chance zones CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 as CZs (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones in which the degree of expectation to win the ART lottery performed during the CZ is different, CZ3 is a chance zone to always win the ART lottery, and CZ1 and CZ2 are the ART lottery with a predetermined probability. Is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state, the CZ that shifts from the normal game state is randomly selected from these CZ1 to CZ3.

  Next, FIG. 50 (B) is a diagram showing a flow of a game when shifting from the CZ1 and CZ2 in the normal game state to the ART game state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half and a second half. The first half is a period in which ranks having different degrees of expectation of winning the ART lottery performed during CZ are promoted, and the second half is a period in which the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by a battle effect.

  During CZ1, six levels of modes are used as ranks, and the higher the mode, the higher the degree of expectation of winning the ART lottery. The first half of CZ1 continues the first number of games (for example, up to 12 games), and performs mode promotion random determination based on the internal winning combination. Then, ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ1.

  Also, during CZ2, ten levels of points are used as ranks, and the higher the points, the higher the degree of expectation for winning the ART lottery. The first half of CZ2 continues the second number of games (for example, up to 15 games), and performs point lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, ART lottery is performed based on points promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ2.

  In the latter half of CZ1, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character A compete against each other is performed, and in the latter half of the CZ2, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character B compete against each other is performed. This battle effect is continued for a third number of games (for example, up to four games), and winning or losing is managed based on the result of the ART lottery. When the ART lottery is won, the teammate character wins and the non-winning is performed. If so, the enemy character wins. In the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, an ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination in each game, and when the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, if a so-called rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination during a battle effect, an ART lottery is performed, and the result of the battle effect is rewritten based on the result.

  In CZ1 and CZ2, if the ART is not won, the game is defeated in the latter half of the battle effect, and the game state basically shifts to the normal game state thereafter. On the other hand, in the case where the ART is won in CZ1 and CZ2, the battle effect is won in the latter half of the battle effect, and then the gaming state shifts to the normal ART through the ART preparation. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, a freeze may occur. In this case, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via preparation for ART).

  Subsequently, FIG. 50 (C) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the CZ3 in the normal game state to the ART game state. The CZ3 continues the fourth game number (for example, a maximum of 17 games), and performs ART random determination for each game based on the internal winning combination. CZ3 ends when the ART lottery is won, and the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) from the next game via ART preparation. In the CZ3, a freeze may occur. In this case as well, the game state shifts to the CT (additional chance zone) from the next game via the preparation for ART. On the other hand, when the fourth game number has elapsed without winning the ART lottery in CZ3, the gaming state shifts to the normal ART via the preparation for the ART. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is determined at the time of the transition.

[Data table used during the general gaming state]
Next, a data table used during the general gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Normal middle and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 51 is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used for transition lottery in the CZ lottery state (low probability and high probability). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery state of the CZ is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery state of the CZ is also shifted at the end of the bonus and at the end of the CZ and ART. FIG. 51A is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the CZ lottery state based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to in each game during the normal game state. FIG. 51B is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the CZ lottery state at the end of a bonus or the like, and is referred to at the time of setting change, at the end of a bonus, or at the end of a CZ or ART.

  The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (A) defines the information of the lottery value for the CZ lottery state after the transition in association with the current CZ lottery state and the winning combination.

  In the following various data tables, information on lottery values is conceptually shown. In the figure, “0” means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “0%” is defined, and “extremely low” means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “0% to less than 1%” is set. “Very low” means that a lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “1% to less than 10%” is defined, and “low” means the lottery probability “10%”. “Medium” means that a lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “30% to less than 60%” is defined, and “medium” means that a lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “30% to less than 60%” is defined. “High” means that a lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “60% to less than 80%” is defined, and “extremely high” means a lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “80% to less than 99%”. The value is defined, and “extremely high” specifies a lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “99% to less than 100%”. Means that are "determined" means that the lottery value corresponding to lottery probability "100%" is defined.

  Then, in the various data tables described below, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256 and “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). The internal random determination is performed by sequentially subtracting the random number for the random determination by the specified random determination value and determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). Will be

  Referring to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a low probability, it is easy to shift to a high probability when the weak cherry is the internal winning combination. . Also, when the current lottery state of the CZ has a high probability, it is understood that the high probability is maintained by determining one of the common bell, cactus, weak cherry, and strong cherry as the internal winning combination. .

  The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51B defines the information of the lottery value of the CZ lottery state after the transition according to the situation at the time of reference. Referring to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51B, it is understood that the CZ lottery state always shifts to the high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
FIG. 52 is a CZ lottery table used for the CZ lottery, and FIG. 52 (A) is a CZ lottery table used when performing the CZ lottery based on the internal winning combination during the normal gaming state. B) is a CZ random determination table used when performing CZ random determination as to whether or not to return the CZ at the time of CZ failure or termination of ART.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (A) defines the information of the lottery value regarding the winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, CZ3 in association with the current CZ lottery state and the internal winning combination. Referring to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52A, it can be seen that the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher when the current CZ lottery state is high probability than when it is low probability.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (B) defines the information of the lottery value regarding the winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3. At the time of CZ failure (at the time of non-winning of the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2) or at the end of the ART gaming state, CZ pull-back lottery is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (B).

<CZ1 Medium Mode Lottery Table>
FIG. 53 is a CZ1 mode up lottery table used for the CZ1 mode up lottery in the first half of CZ1. The CZ1 mode up lottery table defines information on a lottery value regarding the result of the mode up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55 (A) described later, in CZ1, as the mode increases, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases, and when the mode increases to mode 6, the ART lottery is always won. The "mode 1 UP" of the lottery result means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 1, and the "mode 2 UP" of the lottery result means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 2. That is, in the situation where the current mode is “2”, if “Mode 2 UP” is won, the mode of CZ1 increases from “2” to “4”. In addition, when the lottery result is won in “mode 6 UP_freeze occurrence”, a freeze occurs, and an ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<CZ2 medium point lottery table>
FIG. 54 is a CZ2 middle point lottery table used for the CZ2 point-up lottery in the first half of CZ2. The CZ2 medium point lottery table defines the information of the lottery value regarding the result of the point-up lottery in association with the current point and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55 (B), which will be described later, in CZ2, as the point increases, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases, and when the point increases to 10, the ART lottery is surely won. Note that “point 2 UP” in the lottery result means that the point of CZ2 is increased by 2. For example, if the current point is “2” and the point is won as “point 2 UP”, the point of CZ2 is “ It will rise from "2" to "4". Further, when the lottery result is won at “point 10 UP_freeze occurrence”, a freeze occurs, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
55 and 56 are CZ ART lottery tables used for CZ ART lottery, and FIG. 55 (A) is a CZ1 ART lottery table (for CZ1) used in the first game of the latter half of CZ1. FIG. 55B is a CZ ART lottery table (for CZ2) used in the first game of the latter half of CZ2, and FIG. 55C is a CZ used for the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2. FIG. 55 (D) is a CZ ART random determination table (for CZ3) used for ART random determination in CZ3.

  The ART random determination table during CZ (for CZ1) shown in FIG. 55 (A) defines the information of the random determination value regarding the presence or absence of the ART random determination in association with the current mode. The ART random determination table during CZ (for CZ2) shown in FIG. 55 (B) defines information on the lottery value regarding the presence or absence of the ART random determination in association with the current point. Referring to the ART random determination table during CZ (for CZ1) and the ART random determination table during CZ (for CZ2), it can be understood that the higher the rank (mode or point) of the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, the easier the ART random determination is won.

  The CZ ART lottery table during CZ (CZ1, CZ2, during the latter half battle) shown in FIG. 55 (C) defines information on the lottery value regarding the presence or absence of the ART lottery winning in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the ART random determination table during CZ (for the second half battle during CZ1 and CZ2), when the rare role (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as the internal winning combination in the second half of CZ1 and CZ2, a predetermined It can be understood that the ART lottery is won with a probability.

  The CZ3 ART random determination table (for CZ3) illustrated in FIG. 56 (D) defines information on a random determination value regarding presence / absence of ART random determination in association with the number of continuous games in CZ3 and the internal winning combination. Referring to the ART random determination table during CZ (for CZ3), it can be seen that during the CZ3, whenever the ART random determination is won, the CT is also won.

[Game flow during normal ART]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during the normal ART will be described with reference to FIG. The pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal ART and a CT as the ART gaming state (see FIG. 33), and sets an extra chance zone during the CT. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, during the normal ART, a game is performed with the aim of shifting to CT. FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of a lottery transition to CT during normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 57A, the pachislot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT random determination state as states that affect various types of random determination performed during the normal ART. The ART level is provided in four levels from level 1 to level 4, and is controlled mainly based on the number of continuous games during normal ART. The ART level influences the determination of the CT lottery state and the later-described flag conversion lottery during the normal ART. The CT lottery state is provided in four stages of low probability, normal, high probability, and super high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during the normal ART. The CT lottery state affects CT lottery performed during the normal ART and flag conversion lottery performed during the normal ART, which will be described later.

(Normal flag conversion during ART)
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the RT4 game state (that is, during the ART game state), the combination of “F_probable lip”, “F_1 probable lip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye” If any one of “Lip D” is independently determined as the internal winning combination, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, an increase in the number of ART games or a CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 57B is a diagram illustrating a flag lottery method during a normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (B), the pachi-slot machine 1 performs the flag conversion random determination with reference to the ART level and the CT random determination state during the normal ART. As a result, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given, and a notification for displaying a combination of symbols of “triple lip” and a combination of symbols of “reach eye lip” (for example, forward order) (Notification of aiming at a predetermined symbol by pushing). Conversely, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of “Replay” (for example, a notification of a pressing order other than the sequential pressing) is performed. The player performs a stop operation in accordance with the notification, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the notification content, that is, a symbol combination of "triple lip" or a symbol of "reach eye lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won. Is displayed, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, a symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed.

[Data table usually used during ART]
Next, a data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS.

<ART conversion flag lottery table>
FIG. 58 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion during normal ART. In the pachislo machine 1 according to the present embodiment, flag conversion random determination during normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the winning combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” are determined as the internal winning combination, first, the first-stage flag conversion random determination is performed, and when the first-stage flag conversion random determination is won, Thereafter, a second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, when the second-stage flag conversion lottery is won, the combination of “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 certain Chill Lip” is converted to “3-trip Chill Lip”, and the first-stage flag conversion lottery or the second-stage flag conversion lottery Is not won, the combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” are handled as “Replay” without being converted to “Triple Chill Lip”.

  FIG. 58A is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the first stage flag conversion random determination, and FIG. 58B is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the second stage flag conversion random determination. is there. The ART flag conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 58A defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the first-stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is performed only for the combination “F_Clitical Lip” and “F_1 Clilip”, and for the combination “F_Reach Lip A” to “F_Reach Lip D”. Only the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed.

  The in-ART flag conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 58 (B) defines the information of the lottery value regarding the lottery result of the second-stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. Until the CT is won once in the normal ART, the "First time (until the CT is won once)" column of the item "ART level" is referred to.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and (B), in each of the ART flag conversion lottery tables, the random number values (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used in the first and second stages. In order to perform the flag conversion lottery, the two-stage flag conversion lottery can be simulated as the lottery performed using a random number value in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent pachislot machines, the main side is required to perform lottery (eg, ART lottery) on payouts which has conventionally been performed on the sub side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a demand for a mechanism that enables lottery without reducing the capacity and without impairing the game performance.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, by performing the probability denominator 256 in two stages, the probability denominator 65536 can be randomly selected, and thus the capacity can be suppressed. Also, by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state for the second-stage lottery, the flag conversion lottery can be performed not only according to the internal winning combination but also according to the current state. It is possible to carry out flag conversion random determination.

<ART level determination table>
FIG. 59 is an ART level determination table used to determine the ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed at the time of the ART winning in which the transition to the ART gaming state is determined and during the normal ART. FIG. 59A is an ART level determination table for determining an ART level at the time of ART winning, and FIG. 59B is an ART level determination table for determining an ART level during normal ART.

  The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59A defines information on a lottery value for each ART level. If a freeze has occurred during the ART winning (see FIG. 53 and the like), ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59 (B) defines the information of the lottery value for the ART level of the transition destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during the normal ART. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59 (B) defines the information on the lottery value for the ART level of the transition destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during the normal ART at the time of entering the CT. . That is, during the normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continuous games, and the ART level shifts at the timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium-high probability lottery table>
FIG. 60 is a normal ART medium-high probability lottery table for randomly determining the CT lottery state during the normal ART. The normal ART medium-high probability lottery table defines lottery value information about the transition destination CT lottery state in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. When referring to the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table, the role “triple chili lip (winning the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the role“ F_ sure chili lip ”or“ F_1 certain chili lip ”)” or the role “reaching eye lip (role“ F_reaching eye lip ”) In the case of “A” to “F_reach-eye lip D”, the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning) ”, it is understood that the CT lottery state is likely to shift (fall) to“ low probability ”. In the above description, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given. Therefore, the fact that the CT lottery state is likely to fall seems to be contrary to the above description. As will be described later, the combination “triple chili lip” and “reach eye lip” always win the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, the special benefit of CT winning is still provided.

<CT random lottery table during ART>
FIG. 61 is a CT random determination table during ART used for CT random determination during normal ART. The ART during lottery table defines information on a lottery value regarding the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. In the ART during CT lottery table, if “cactus”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “triple lip”, “reach lip”, and “BB” are determined as internal winning combinations, the probability denominator 256 CT random determination is performed using a random number value. On the other hand, when another role (for example, replay, common bell, push order bell, etc.) is determined as the internal winning combination, CT random determination is performed using a random number in the range of the probability denominator 65536.

  The pachislot machine 1 has “normal CT” and “high-accuracy CT” as CTs. The “normal CT” and the “high-accuracy CT” have different expectations for the number of ART games added in the CT (additional chance zone), and the “high-accuracy CT” has a larger number of ART games than the “normal CT”. Are easily added (see FIG. 66).

<Additional lottery table during normal ART>
FIG. 62 is a normal ART additional lottery table used for additional lottery for adding the number of ART games during the normal ART. In the normal ART addition lottery table, information on the lottery value regarding the lottery result of the additional lottery is defined in association with the internal winning combination.

[Game flow during CT]
Next, the flow of a game during CT will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, CT is performed by eight games per set. During CT, an additional lottery is performed based on the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination. When the additional lottery is won, the number of games is not subtracted, and the number of games is reduced only when the additional lottery is not won. Is done. Therefore, during CT, the game in which the number of ART games is added does not end, and the game ends when the game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed eight times in the same set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 (A) and 63 (B), if the winning combination “Triple Chililip” is won during the CT (that is, if the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the winning combination “F_Sure Chililip” or “F_1 Surelilip” is won) ) A set of eight games is reset. For example, if a game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed seven times in the same set, and if a game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed one more time, the CT ends, but the role "3 consecutive chili lip" , The CT is reset, and as a result, the CT does not end until a game in which the number of ART games is not added eight times is performed thereafter. Therefore, the CT is more likely to be continued as the role "triple chili lip" is won.

(Conversion of flag during CT)
FIG. 63C is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During the CT, the role "F_Sure Chiri Lip" and "F_1 Sure Chili Lip" are always converted to the role "Triple Chili Lip". As described above, if the winning combination "Tri-Chili-Lip" is won during CT, the CT is reset. Therefore, if the winning combination "F_Positive Chili-Lip" or "F_1 Positive Chili-Lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the CT is reset. Will be set.

  On the other hand, the winning combinations “F_Reach Rep A” to “F_Reach Rep D” are controlled based on a three-stage table (tables 0 to 2). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), Table 0 has the lowest probability of conversion to “Reach eye lip”, Table 1 has the next lowest probability of conversion to “Reach eye lip”, and Table 2 Is most likely to be converted to a "reach eye lip". Note that, when the winning combination “Reach eye lip” is won during the CT, a CT is newly given as shown in FIG. 67 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (C), in the normal CT, the table is determined based on the ART level. In high probability CT, table 0 is always determined regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS.

<CT table lottery table>
FIG. 64 is a CT table lottery table for determining a table used for flag conversion lottery from the three-stage table. The in-CT table lottery table defines information on a lottery value for a table used for flag conversion lottery in association with a state such as an ART level and a type of CT to be executed. The during-CT table lottery table is referred to when it is determined to win CT lottery and shift to CT, or when CT is started, and determines a table to be used for flag conversion lottery during CT.

<CT conversion flag lottery table>
FIG. 65 is a flag conversion random determination table during CT used for flag conversion random determination during CT. The CT flag conversion lottery table defines information on a lottery value regarding the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. Referring to the during-CT flag conversion lottery table, it can be seen that during CT, the combination "F_Sure Chill Lip" and "F_1 Circular Chill" are always converted to the combination "Triple Chill Lip".

<Additional lottery table during CT>
FIG. 66 is a CT addition lottery table used for additional lottery for adding the number of ART games during CT. The extra lottery table during CT defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination. It is to be noted that, for a combination other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 66, there is no chance to win the additional lottery during CT.

  In addition, in the additional lottery during the normal CT, the number of additional games differs according to the number of times of winning the role "triple chili lip". More specifically, if the number of wins of the role “triple chili lip” during the same CT is “1 to 8”, “10 games” is easily determined as the number of additional games, and during the same CT, If the number of wins for the role "3 consecutive Chili Lips" is "9-16 times", "20 games" is likely to be determined as the number of additional games, and the number of times the role "3 consecutive Chili Lips" is won during the same CT Is "17 to 24 times", it is easy to determine "30 games" as the number of additional games, and if the number of wins for the role "triple chili lip" during the same CT is "25 or more times", It is easy to determine “50 games” as the number of additional games.

  More specifically, in the extra lottery table during CT, if the number of wins of the combination “3 consecutive chili lip” during the same CT is “1 to 8 times”, the combination “3 consecutive chili lip” The number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely high” is “10 games”, and the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely low” is “20 games”. Then, when the number of wins of the combination “3 consecutive chili lip” during the same CT becomes “9 or more”, the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely high” of the combination “3 consecutive chili lip” in the figure is “ 20 games ". Further, when the number of wins of the combination “3 consecutive chili lip” during the same CT becomes “17 times or more”, it corresponds to the lottery values “extreme high” and “extremely low” of the combination “3 consecutive chili lip” in the figure. The number of additional games is promoted to “30 games”. Similarly, when the number of wins of the role "triple chili lip" during the same CT becomes "25 or more", the lottery values "extreme high" and "extreme low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure correspond to The number of additional games to be promoted to “50 games”.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games to be added per game is increased in accordance with the number of times of winning the combination "3 consecutive chili lip" during CT. As described above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT does not end, and the CT is reset when the role of "triple chili lip" is won. Can be expected to increase as the amount of addition increases per time, and the interest during CT improves. Also, the number of times that the amount of addition per game is increased is a number of times (9 or more) greater than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT, so that an excessive profit is provided to the player. It can be prevented from giving, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

<Additional lottery table during CT>
FIG. 67 is a CT number addition lottery table used for the number of sets added to give a new CT during CT. The number-of-sets-in-CT extra lottery table defines information on the lottery value of the lottery result of the extra number of sets in association with the type of the CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 67, if a winning combination “Reach eye lip” is won during CT, a new CT is given. In the case where a new CT is added in accordance with the set number added lottery, a new CT is started again at the timing when the executed CT is completed.

  It should be noted that the number of winnings for the above-mentioned combination "3 consecutive chili lip" is counted only during the same CT. However, this "during the same CT" means that the number of sets performed during the CT is added to the lottery. May be included or may not be included.

[Game flow during bonus state]
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the bonus state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 (A) is a diagram showing a flow of a game when the game shifts to the bonus state during the normal game state (ART non-winning), and FIG. 68 (B) shows a game flow when the game shifts to the bonus state during the normal ART. FIG. 68 (C) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the case where the game has shifted to the bonus state during CT. As shown in FIGS. 68 (A) to (C), the pachislo machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as types of bonus, and determines the type of bonus when shifting to the bonus state. At this time, if the special BB is determined, after the end of the bonus state, a transition is made to the CT via the preparation for ART. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow differs depending on the state before shifting to the bonus state.

  With reference to FIG. 68 (A), when the normal game state is shifted to the normal BB, the ART random determination is performed during the normal BB based on the internal winning combination. When this ART lottery is won, after the bonus state is completed, the process shifts to the normal ART via ART preparation. After winning the ART lottery, an additional lottery is performed during the bonus state.

  Referring to FIG. 68 (B), when the normal ART is shifted to the normal BB, CT random determination is performed at the end of the normal BB. The CT lottery is won with a probability of 50%, and if it is won, the process proceeds to the CT via the ART preparation after the bonus state is completed, and if not won, the process proceeds to the normal ART via the ART preparation after the bonus state is completed. I do. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, an additional lottery is also performed for the number of ART games.

  Referring to FIG. 68 (C), when the transition from the CT to the normal BB or the special BB is made, the transition to the CT is performed after the completion of the bonus state via the preparation for ART. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, an additional lottery is also performed for the number of ART games.

[Data table used during bonus state]
Subsequently, a data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 69 is a bonus type lottery table for determining a bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines information on a lottery value for the bonus type in association with the state before shifting to the bonus state.

<Additional lottery table for ART games during bonus>
FIG. 70 is a bonus lottery table for the number of ART games during bonus used for the ART lottery and the additional lottery performed in the bonus state. The number-of-additional-RT game lottery table defines information on the lottery result of the ART lottery and the number of additional games in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

  The bonus lottery table for the number of ART games during the bonus is used for the ART lottery in the ART non-winning state (in the normal BB shifted from the general game state until the ART lottery is won). That is, if one or more (actually, at least 50 games) is determined as the number of additional games in the ART non-winning state, the ART lottery is won and the corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after the ART winning, the ART game number additional lottery table during the bonus is used for the ART game number additional lottery.

<CT lottery table at the end of bonus>
FIG. 71 is a bonus end CT lottery table used for CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The bonus end-time CT lottery table defines information on a lottery value regarding the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the bonus type and the gaming state before shifting to the bonus state. Referring to the bonus end CT lottery table shown in FIG. 71, for example, it can be seen that, when the normal BB is performed during the normal ART, the CT is won with a probability of 50% at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow during general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 72, the flow of an exceptional game in the general game state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, basically, the normal game state is shifted to the CZ during the general game state, and the ART game state is aimed at by winning the ART lottery in the CZ. Here, the pachislot machine 1 realizes the ART gaming state by notifying during the RT4 gaming state, and controls the RT gaming state according to the combination of displayed symbols as shown in FIG. are doing. As shown in FIG. 47, the combination of symbols for shifting the RT gaming state is displayed in accordance with the order of the player's stop operation (the order of pressing), so even if the notification is not performed. In some cases, the game may shift to the RT4 game state by chance.

  Further, in the RT4 gaming state, there is a possibility that the combination of “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” may be determined as an internal winning combination, and therefore, even in the general gaming state (non-ART), A reach eye (reach eye lip) to which a special privilege is given can be displayed. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the game machine accidentally shifts to the RT4 game state during the normal game state (non-ART), it is possible to display a symbol combination of “reach eye lip”. In this state, it is possible to shift to the ART gaming state (normal ART) without passing through the CZ.

  More specifically, when the combination of “F_reach-eye lip A” to “F_reach-eye lip D” is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal gaming state and the RT4 gaming state, the flag conversion lottery is performed. When the flag conversion lottery is won, a notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of “reach eye lip” is issued and an ART right is granted. Conversely, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying the symbol combination of “Replay” is performed, and control is performed so that the symbol combination of “Reach eye lip” is not displayed.

<Non-ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 73 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed in the normal game state and the RT4 game state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by control on the main side]
Conventionally, in the pachislot machine, the information of the stop operation (such as the pressing order) is notified under the control of the sub (sub-control board 72) side in the ART machine. In recent years, it has been required that the main (main control board 71) that manages the profits of the player perform the notification in order to affect so-called balls. Therefore, in the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71 is provided with an instruction monitor for notifying the information of the stop operation, and notifies the information of the stop operation under the control of the main side. I have to do that.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the notification (navi) performed on the main side and the notification (navi) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 74, the main control board 71 notifies the information of the stop operation by displaying numerical values of “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values “1” to “11” uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation reported by each, and “1” to “3” indicate the types of the reels performing the first stop operation, respectively. "1" means that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "2" means that the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and "3" Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

  Also, “4” to “9” indicate the pressing order to be notified, “4” means that the pressing order is “left, middle, right”, and “5” indicates that the pressing order is “ "6" means that the pressing order is "middle, left, right", and "7" means that the pressing order is "middle, right, left" "8" means that the pressing order is "right, left, middle", and "9" means that the pressing order is "right, middle, left".

  Further, “10” and “11” are used to notify the role related to the bonus, and “10” means a symbol combination “C_BB1” composed of “white 7-white 7-white 7”, and “11”. Means a symbol combination "C_BB2" consisting of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7".

  Here, the numerical values of “1” to “11” notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation to be notified, but not all players can clearly understand the contents of the notification. Absent. In other words, there is a possibility that the content of the notification cannot be grasped by some players simply by displaying “6” on the instruction monitor on the main side.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the contents of the stop operation are also reported on the sub side together with the notification on the main side. Specifically, the pachislo machine 1 is provided with a display unit 100 controlled by the sub-control board 72, and notifies the information of the stop operation under the control of the sub-side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is to be performed on the left reel 3L, “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the left reel 3L of the display unit 100 is displayed on the sub side. "1" is displayed at the top to notify that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when the push order “middle, left, right” is notified, “6” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and “1” is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. "," 2 "above the left reel 3L, and" 3 "above the right reel 3R to notify that the pressing order is" middle, left, right ". When “F_BB1” is determined as the internal winning combination, “10” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed to inform the player of the symbol to be aimed at.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (A), during the ART preparation, “Bell Navi”, “Maintenance Lip Navi”, “RT3 Transition Lip Navi” and “RT4 Transition Lip Navi” are performed under the control of the main side. “Bell Navi” notifies the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination of “Bell” for the combination “F_3 Choice Bell_1st” to “F_3 Choice Bell — 3rd”. The “maintenance lip navigator” informs the combinations “F_maintenance lip — 1st” to “F_maintenance lip — 3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination of “replay”. The “RT3 transition lip navigation” notifies the pressing order for displaying the combination of the symbols of “RT3 transition lip” for the combination “F_RT3 transition lip — 1st” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 3rd”. The “RT4 shift lip navigation” notifies the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination of “RT4 shift lip” to the combination “F_RT4 shift lip — 123” to “F_RT4 shift lip — 3rd”.

  The timing at which the notification is performed on the main side may be at least during one game in which the notification is performed, and is arbitrary. For example, the main-side notification may be performed at the timing of receiving the start operation, or the main-side notification may be performed at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The notification on the main side may be performed at the timing when any of the above is received. On the other hand, it is preferable that the timing at which the notification is performed on the sub side is at least the timing before the first stop operation. In this regard, in the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment, a notification is issued on both the main side and the sub side when the start operation is received or when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started. Thereby, before the player performs the stop operation, the information of the stop operation is notified on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display unit 100 on the sub side.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (B), during the ART gaming state, “Bell Navi”, “Maintenance Lip Navi”, “RT3 Transition Lip Navi” and “RT4 Transition Lip Navi” are performed under control of the main side. During the ART gaming state (RT4 gaming state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and based on the result of the lottery, a push for displaying a combination of "triple lip", "reach eye lip" or "replay" symbol is performed. The order is notified, but this notification is not performed on the main side, but only on the sub side.

  As described above, since the combination of the symbols "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" is related to the grant of a special privilege, the presence or absence of the notification may affect the profit (payout) of the player. Can also be considered. However, the pachislot machine 1 actually gives a special privilege based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the combination of displayed symbols does not affect the privilege to be given. In other words, when the flag conversion lottery is won, even if the symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In this case, even if the combination of the symbols “triple lip” and “reach eye lip” can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of the displayed symbols does not affect the profit (payout) of the player, the main monitor is not notified on the instruction monitor, and The notification on the display unit 100 is performed only on the side.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 (C) and 74 (D), during the RT5 gaming state (inter-flag state), a notification is made to aim at a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), when the role “F_BB1” is carried over, “white 7 navi” is performed, and as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the role “F_BB2” is carried over. If so, "blue 7 navigation" is performed. “White 7 Navi” informs the role “F_BB1” of the stop operation information for displaying the combination of the symbols “C_BB1”, and “Blue 7 Navi” notifies the role “F_BB2” The information of the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination of “C_BB2” is notified.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 48, in the flag-to-flag state, the role related to the bonus and one of “losing”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, and “F_special 3” are determined as internal winning combinations. In this case, the combination of the symbols of BB can be displayed, and if the other combination is determined as the internal winning combination together with the combination relating to the bonus, the combination of the symbols of BB cannot be displayed. For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 74 (C) and (D), when performing control on the main side, the main control board 71 and the role related to the carried-over bonus and “losing”, “F_special role 1”, “F_special role” "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" is performed only when one of "2" and "F_Special combination 3" is determined as an internal winning combination. Thus, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing at which the winning combination related to the bonus can be won.

  Note that the main control board 71 may perform “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” only after notifying that the combination relating to the bonus is determined as an internal winning combination (bonus notification). Here, the bonus notification is performed by, for example, displaying a bonus confirmation screen, turning on a bonus confirmation lamp, or the like.

  As an example, when the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, an effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over several games is performed, and a bonus confirmation screen is displayed according to the result of the continuous effect. Generally done. If "White 7 Navi" or the like is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be known in the middle, and the interest may be spoiled. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 performs "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after the bonus notification is performed. Note that a method of enabling the main side to know the timing at which the bonus notification is performed is arbitrary.

  As one method, when the combination relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required until the bonus is announced, and after the number of games is consumed, the “white 7 navi” or the “blue 7 Navigating "can be considered. More specifically, when determining the number of games required until the bonus notification, the main control board 71 notifies the sub control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games, and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games has been exhausted, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side can be grasped. In other words, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games after determining the combination related to the bonus as the internal winning combination in a state where the combination related to the bonus is not carried over, and after the counting result reaches the predetermined number. "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" when the winning combination and any of "Loose", "F_Special Combination 1", "F_Special Combination 2", and "F_Special Combination 3" are determined as internal winning combinations. I do.

  As another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side instead of the sub side can be considered. More specifically, the main control board 71 determines the effect to be executed on the display unit 100 (at least the number of games required for the effect) when the role related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in a state where the role related to the bonus is not carried over. Determined and notified to the sub-control board 72. The sub-control board 72 executes the notified effect and displays the bonus confirmation screen, so that it is possible to grasp the timing at which the bonus is notified on the main side.

  Of course, the timing at which the bonus notification is performed by another method may be grasped on the main side. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot receive a signal from the sub control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is performed based on the signal that the main control board 71 can receive. . For example, since a signal associated with the stop operation can be received by the main control board 71, a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than the forward push) is performed in a state where the combination relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. In such a case, a bonus notification may be performed. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 acquires information on the internal winning combination and information on the stop operation from the main control board 71, and a combination of these information is a predetermined combination (internal winning combination “role related to bonus”). If the stop operation is “other than the forward push”, a bonus notification is made. Since such a bonus notification can also be grasped on the main control board 71, the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side can be grasped.

[Description of operation of main control board]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 31 of the main control board 71 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Main operation processing of pachislot under control of main CPU>
First, a procedure of main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 31 will be described with reference to a flowchart (hereinafter, referred to as a main flow) shown in FIG.

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process when the power is turned on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 33 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area in which data must be deleted for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a medal acceptance / start check process (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 42S and the start switch 6S is checked.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this processing, the main CPU 31 refers to an internal lottery table (FIGS. 39 and 40) corresponding to the current gaming state and randomly selects a role determined as an internal winning combination from a plurality of roles. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination “F_BB1” or “F_BB2” has been determined as the internal winning combination in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the winning combination “F_BB1” or “F_BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently turns on the RT5 gaming state flag and sets the gaming state to the inter-flag gaming state (S6).

  Subsequent to the processing in S6, or if it is determined in S5 that the combination “F_BB1” or “F_BB2” has not been determined as an internal winning combination (NO), the main CPU 31 proceeds to state determination in FIG. A game control process is performed (S7).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a main navigation control process (S8). In this process, the main CPU 31 sets the navigation data according to the current gaming state and the internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub control board 72. The notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop initialization process described later with reference to FIG. 86 (S9). In this process, reel stop control information used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 33 and used in the reel stop control processing of S12.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates start command data and transmits it to the sub control board 72. It should be noted that the start command data includes various types of information necessary for producing an effect such as an internal winning combination.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel rotation start process after performing the wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 31 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec) until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed. Control is performed so that the constant speed is maintained.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop control process described later with reference to FIG. 87 (S12). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S9, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R are pressed. You.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout processing, as a result of stopping the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line, according to the combination of the symbols such as the payout of medals and the operation of the replay game. Grant profits. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates winning operation command data and transmits the data to the sub-control board 72. The winning operation command data includes various information such as a combination of symbols displayed along the activated line.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a BB check process described later with reference to FIG. 88 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls operation and termination of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an RT check process described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs control for shifting the RT gaming state based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a CZ / ART termination process described later with reference to FIG. 91 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs the CZ pull-back lottery. When the process at the end of the CZ / ART is performed, the main CPU 31 returns the process to S2 assuming that one game (unit game) has been completed.

<Control processing by state>
Next, the state-specific control processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the state-specific control processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current game state is the RT4 game state (S31). When the game is in the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process described later with reference to FIG. 77 (S32).

  Subsequent to the processing of S32, or when it is determined in S31 that the game is not in the RT4 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33). ). If it is in the normal game state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal start process described later with reference to FIG. 78 (S34), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CZ (S35). If it is during CZ (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a process during start in CZ described later with reference to FIG. 79 (S36), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is normal ART (S37). If the normal ART is being performed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal ART start-time process described later with reference to FIG. 83 (S38), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the normal ART (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current gaming state is CT (S39). If the CT is being performed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a process during a CT start described later with reference to FIG. 84 (S40), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a BB start process described later with reference to FIG. 85 (S42), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 31 performs other processing (S43), and ends the state-specific control processing. For example, when the ART is being prepared, the main CPU 31 performs processing according to the preparation.

<Flag conversion processing>
Next, the flag conversion processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is time to start CT (S50). If it is at the start of CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the flag conversion table during CT lottery table (FIG. 64) to randomly select a table number to be used for flag conversion during CT and set it. (S51).

  Subsequent to the process of S51, or if it is not at the start of CT in S50 (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a flag conversion lottery table according to the current state (S52). For example, when the current state is the non-ART RT4 game state, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 73) is set, and when the current state is the normal ART RT4 game state. When the current state is the RT4 gaming state during CT, the flag conversion during lottery table (FIG. 65) is set.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and subsequently determines whether or not a winning has been achieved (S54). When the flag conversion lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process (S55). In this process, for example, when the combination "F_1 probable chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, processing is performed so that the combination "F_1 probable chili lip" is treated as the combination "triple chili lip".

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is during non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state has been accidentally performed in response to the player's stop operation in a state where the notification of the general gaming state (non-ART) is not performed. judge. If the current game state is during the non-ART state (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the ART set number (S57), and then sets ART preparation in the next game (S58), and sets a flag. The conversion process ends. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the non-ART state (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the flag conversion processing.

  In S54, when the flag conversion lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 performs a flag maintaining process (S59), and ends the flag conversion process. In the flag maintaining process, for example, when the combination “F_1 certainty lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, processing is performed such that the combination “F_1 certainty lip” is treated as the combination “replay”.

<Process during normal start>
Next, the normal start process will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal start process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (A) and performs the CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and the internal winning combination (S61).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not this CZ lottery has been won (S62). If the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the type of CZ that has won the next game (S63), and then sets a value corresponding to the type of CZ that has won in the CZ game number counter. (S64). The CZ game number counter is a counter for counting the duration of the CZ, and when the CZ1 is won, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), When the CZ2 has been won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half). When the CZ3 has been won, the fourth game number is set in the CZ game number counter. (For example, 17) is set.

  Subsequent to the processing of S64, or if the CZ lottery has not been won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the normal medium-high probability lottery table of FIG. The transfer lottery of the CZ lottery state is performed based on the winning combination (S65), the CZ lottery state is updated based on the result of the transfer lottery (S66), and the normal start process ends.

<Start processing during CZ>
Next, referring to FIG. 79, the process at the time of starting during CZ will be described. In the processing at the time of starting during CZ, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is during CZ1 (S71). If it is during CZ1 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs processing during CZ1 (CZ2), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (S72), and ends the processing at the start during CZ.

  On the other hand, when it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If it is during CZ2 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs processing during CZ1 (CZ2), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (S74), and ends the processing during start during CZ. In the present embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in the rank (mode or point) at which the degree of expectation to win the ART lottery is different, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one processing in CZ1 (CZ2) in one processing.

On the other hand, when it is not during CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs processing during CZ3, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 (S75), and ends the processing during start during CZ.

<CZ1 (CZ2) middle processing>
Next, the processing during CZ1 (CZ2) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the middle processing of CZ1 (CZ2), first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). If it is the first half (YES), the main CPU 31 shifts the processing to S82. If it is not the first half (the second half) (NO), the main CPU 31 shifts the processing to S91 in FIG.

  If it is the first half of CZ1, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ1 mode up lottery table (FIG. 53) and performs mode up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Similarly, if it is the first half of CZ2, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ2 medium point lottery table (FIG. 54) and performs point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 updates the mode (or points) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a freeze has been won in the lottery in S82 (S84). When the freeze is won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S85). In this process, the main CPU 31 further determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59A). When a freeze occurs, "ART level 2" is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 terminates the CZ, sets the ART preparation in the next game (S86), and terminates the CZ1 (CZ2) middle processing.

  On the other hand, when the freeze is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 31 decrements the CZ game number counter (first half) by 1 (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). If the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ1 (CZ2) in-process.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 to the next game (S89), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2). I do.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 81, when the game is the latter half of CZ1 or CZ2, main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first game of the latter half (S91). If it is the first game of the second half, the ART random determination is performed based on the mode or points of the first half with reference to the ART random determination table during CZ (FIGS. 55A and 55B) (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not this ART lottery has been won (S93).

  When the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the ART set number and randomly selects the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). Is set (S94). Subsequent to the processing of S94, or when the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value to the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 31 sets “4” in the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is won, and sets “3” in the CZ game number counter (second half) when the ART lottery is not won. Is set.

  Subsequent to the process of S95, or if the game is not one game in the second half in S91 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART random determination table during CZ (FIG. 55 (C)) to obtain an internal winning combination. ART lottery is performed based on the result (S96), and it is determined whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S97). If the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the ART set number and randomly selects the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). And set (S98).

  Subsequent to the processing of S98, or when the ART lottery has not been won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (second half) (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). If the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ1 (CZ2) in-process.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the ART set number is 1 or more (S101). If the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently terminates CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and terminates processing during CZ1 (CZ2). . On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not one or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ failure time (S103), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

<CZ3 middle processing>
Next, the processing in CZ3 will be described with reference to FIG. In the processing during CZ3, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the ART random determination table during CZ (FIG. 56 (D)) to perform ART random determination based on the internal winning combination (S121), and determines whether or not this ART random determination has been won. It is determined whether or not it is (S122).

  When the ART lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a freeze has been won in the ART lottery in S121 (S124). If the freeze has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game (S125).

  Subsequent to the process of S125, or when the freeze is not won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S127), and ends the CZ3 middle processing.

  On the other hand, when the ART lottery has not been won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently decrements the CZ game number counter by one (S128). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). When the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ3 middle processing.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the ART set number, and randomly selects and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). (S130). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 terminates the CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S131), and terminates the CZ3 middle processing.

<Processing during start during normal ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the process at the time of the start during the normal ART will be described. In the processing during the normal ART start, first, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the ART continuous game number counter (S141). The ART continued game number counter is a counter that counts the number of games for which the normal ART has been continued. In this embodiment, in addition to the ART continuous game number counter, an ART finished game number counter for counting the number of games for which the normal ART can be continued is provided. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuation game number counter with the value of the ART ending game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuation game number counter reaches the value of the ART ending game number counter, changes the ART gaming state. finish.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the during-CT RT lottery table (FIG. 61) to perform a CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142), and determines whether or not this CT lottery has been won. Is determined (S143). If the CT lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of CT sets and sets 8 to the number-of-CT games counter (S144). The CT is set (S145).

  Subsequent to the process of S145, or if the CT lottery has not been won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59B) and sets the ART continuous game number counter. The ART level is determined by lottery based on the value of and is set (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal ART medium-high-probability lottery table (FIG. 60) and randomly selects and sets the transition-destination CT random determination state based on the current CT random determination state and the internal winning combination (S147). .

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal ART extra lottery table (FIG. 62) to perform an additional lottery based on the internal winning combination based on the internal winning combination (S148), and determines whether or not the additional lottery has been won. A determination is made (S149). If the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S150).

  Subsequent to the processing of S150, or when the additional lottery has not been won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the value of the ART continuous game number counter to the value of the ART end game number counter. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S151). When the value of the ART continued game number counter has not reached the value of the ART end game number counter (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the normal start during ART process.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuous game number counter has reached the value of the ART end game number counter (YES), the main CPU 31 decrements the ART set number by one (S152). It is set (S153), and the processing at the start during the normal ART ends.

<Start processing during CT>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the processing at the start during CT will be described. In the processing during the start during CT, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the additional lottery table during CT (FIG. 66) to perform an additional lottery based on the internal winning combination based on the internal winning combination (S161). It is determined whether or not a winning has been achieved (S162).

  If the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S163). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the additional amount per one time increases as the number of times of winning the combination "triple chili lip" during the same CT increases.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the combination “3 consecutive chips” (that is, whether or not the internal winning combination has been converted to the combination “3 consecutive copies” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 77) (S164). ). If the internal winning combination is the combination of "triple chili lip" (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently resets the CT game number counter to 8 (S165), and terminates the CT start process. If the internal winning combination is not the combination “3 consecutive chili lip” (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during the start during CT.

  In S162, when the additional lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the CT set number additional lottery table (FIG. 67) to determine the CT set number based on the internal winning combination. An additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won (S167). If the additional lottery has been won in the number of CT sets (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and ends the processing during the start during CT.

  On the other hand, if the additional lottery has not been won in the number of CT sets (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently decrements the CT game number counter by one (S169). Is determined to be 0 (S170). If the CT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CT start-time process.

  If the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of CT sets is one or more (S172). If the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets 8 to the number-of-CT-games counter (S173), and ends the during-CT start-time process. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not one or more (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CT, sets the normal ART to the next game (S174), and ends the processing during the start during the CT.

<Start processing during BB>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the process at the start during BB will be described. In the BB start-time process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the bonus ART game number addition lottery table (FIG. 70) and performs the additional ART game number lottery based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not an additional lottery has been won (S182). If the additional lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB start-time process.

  On the other hand, if the additional lottery has been won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). If the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 31 ends the processing during start during BB. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185), and ends the process during start during BB.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initialization processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop initial setting process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to a spinner stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires a spinner stop number based on an internal winning combination or the like (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the turning body stop initial setting table and acquires each piece of information based on the turning body stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 31 obtains various information associated with the turning body stop number, for example, determination data according to the pressing order.

  Next, the main CPU 31 stores the rotating identifier in a symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 31 sets bits of all symbol code storage areas (excluding unused areas) to “1”. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initialization processing. The stop button inactivity counter is used to determine the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R for which the player has not performed a stop operation, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 33.

<Reel stop control processing>
Next, a reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process for determining whether or not a signal has been output from the stop switch 7S. When determining that the effective stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S201.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 31 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 31 stores a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (not shown) according to the pressed stop button. (Not shown) is updated (S202). That is, the main CPU 31 updates the operation stop button storage area to manage the type of the pressed stop button and updates the pressed order storage area based on the type of the pressed stop button and its order. Manages the order (push order) of the stop operation.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 33 based on the symbol counter (S204). S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the relevant reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 7S.

  Next, the main CPU 31 executes a sliding piece number determination process (S206). The number-of-slide-pieces determination processing determines the number of slide pieces specified at the stop start position based on reel stop control information (stop table group) selected from the spinning drum stop initialization table based on the internal winning combination. Processing.

  Next, the main CPU 31 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in a communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 33. A generation process is performed (S167). The reel stop command data indicates the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding frames (or the expected stop position), and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines the expected stop position based on the stop start position and the number-of-slide-pieces determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 33 (S208). The expected stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any one of predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and a symbol position at which the rotation of the reel stops. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 31 sets the expected stop position as a search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 31 executes a symbol code storage process (S210). In this symbol code storing process, the symbol code of the symbol position data for checking for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 31 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S211). Next, the main CPU 31 performs a control change process (S212). In this control change process, when the vehicle is at a specific stop position, the stop information group used for stopping the reels is updated.

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S213). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is no longer output from the stop switch 7S.

  When determining that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S213. On the other hand, when determining that the pressed stop button has been released (YES), the main CPU 31 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). Here, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes a pull-in priority storing process (S216) and executes a process of step S201. In this draw-in priority storing process, the draw-in priority of all the symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C and 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the reel stop control processing.

<BB check processing>
Subsequently, the BB check processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the BB check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a bonus state is being made (S221). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a winning determination medal payout process from the BB payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state (S13 in FIG. 75). The number of paid out medals paid out in (2) is subtracted (S222).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the payout number counter during BB has become less than 0 (S223). If the payout number counter during BB is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is terminated, while if the payout number counter during BB is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 proceeds to A bonus end process is performed (S224). In this process, the main CPU 31 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 gaming state flag to ON.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the bonus lottery CT lottery table (FIG. 71) to perform the CT lottery at the time of the bonus end (S225), and determines whether or not the CT lottery has been won (S226). If the CT lottery has been won, the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S227). When the number of the ART sets is 0 and the CT lottery is won, in step S227, one is added to the number of the CT sets and one is also added to the number of the ART sets.

  Subsequent to the processing of S227, or when the CT lottery has not been won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more ( S228). If the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state, sets ART preparation in the next game (S229), and performs BB check processing. finish.

  On the other hand, when neither the number of ART sets nor the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state to the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 51B), randomly selects and sets the CZ random determination state (S231), and ends the BB check process.

  If it is not in the bonus state in S221 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of BB symbols (C_BB1, 2) is displayed (S232). If the combination of BB symbols is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB check process.

  On the other hand, when the combination of the symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the bonus type random determination table (FIG. 69) to randomly select and set the bonus type (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs a bonus start process (S235), and ends the BB check process. In the bonus start-time process, the main CPU 31 performs various processes such as starting the operation of the bonus and setting the bonus state in the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, the RT check processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the game is in the RT5 game state (S241). If it is in the RT5 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while if it is not in the RT5 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 continues to perform the RT0 gaming state. It is determined whether or not (S242).

  If it is determined in S242 that the game is in the RT0 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the symbol combination of "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (S243). If “bell spilled eyes” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if “bell spilled eyes” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 proceeds to Subsequently, the RT2 game state flag is set to ON, the game state is shifted from the RT0 game state to the RT2 game state (S244), and the RT check process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the RT0 game state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the game is in the RT1 game state (S245). If the game is in the RT1 game state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (S246). When "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON, turns off the RT1 gaming state flag, and shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. (S247), and terminates the RT check process.

  On the other hand, if "bell spilled eyes" is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not 20 games have passed in the RT1 gaming state (S248). If 20 games have not elapsed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while if 20 games have elapsed (YES), the main CPU 31 turns off the RT1 game state flag and sets the RT1. The game state is shifted to the RT0 game state (S249), and the RT check process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT1 gaming state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not in the RT2 gaming state (S250). If the game is in the RT2 game state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the symbol combination of “RT3 shift lip” is displayed (S251). If “RT3 transition lip” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if “RT3 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 Subsequently, the RT3 game state flag is set to ON and the RT2 game state flag is turned OFF, and the state is shifted from the RT2 game state to the RT3 game state (S252), and the RT check process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT2 game state in S250 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the game is in the RT3 game state (S261). If the game is in the RT3 game state (YES), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the symbol combination of “bell spilled eyes” or “RT2 shift lip” is displayed (S262). When “bell spilled eyes” or “RT2 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 game state flag on, turns off the RT3 game state flag, and changes the RT3 game state to the RT2 game state. The state is shifted to the state (S263), and the RT check process ends.

  On the other hand, when neither “bell spilled eyes” nor “RT2 shift lip” is displayed in S262, the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the symbol combination of “RT4 shift lip” is displayed. (S264). If “RT4 transition lip” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if “RT4 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 Subsequently, the RT4 game state flag is set to ON, and the RT3 game state flag is turned OFF, to shift from the RT3 game state to the RT4 game state (S265).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not ART preparation is set (S266). If the ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while if the ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 31 determines the number of CT sets. Is greater than or equal to 1 (S267).

  If the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 sets CT in the next game, sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, if the number of CT sets is not one or more (NO), the main CPU 31 sets the normal ART for the next game, sets a predetermined value to the ART end game number counter (S269), and ends the RT check processing. I do.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT3 gaming state in S261 (NO), since the game is in the RT4 gaming state, the main CPU 31 subsequently displays a symbol combination of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 shift lip". It is determined whether or not it has been (S270). If neither “bell spilled eyes” nor “RT2 transition lip” is displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check processing, while “bell spilled eyes” or “RT2 transition lip” is not displayed. If it is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 gaming state flag on and turns off the RT4 gaming state flag, shifts from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (S271), and executes the RT check process. finish.

<End of CZ / ART processing>
Subsequently, the CZ / ART termination processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the CZ / ART termination processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ has failed or the ART has terminated (S281). If neither the CZ failure nor the ART termination (NO), the main CPU 31 terminates the CZ • ART termination processing, while if the CZ failure or the ART termination (YES), Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 52 (B)), performs CZ pull-back lottery (S282), and determines whether or not this pull-back lottery has been won (S283).

  When the pull-back lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the type of CZ that has won the next game (S284), and sets a value corresponding to the type of CZ that has won in the CZ game number counter. Then (S285), the process at the end of CZ • ART is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the pull-back lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the normal game state to the next game (S286). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 51B), determines the lottery state of the CZ, sets it (S287), and ends the process at the end of the CZ ART.

[Operation of sub-control board]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control board 72 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Sub side navigation control processing>
First, the sub navigation control processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the sub side navigation control processing, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation data has been acquired (S301). The sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data determined by the main control board 71 from the start command data received from the main control board 71. In the process of S301, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the received start command data includes navigation data.

  If the navigation data has been acquired (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets sub navigation data according to the navigation data (S302). Referring to FIG. 74, for example, when navigation data “4” is acquired, sub CPU 81 sets navigation data for notifying the pressing order “left, middle, right” as sub-side navigation data. I do. Thereby, the content of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

  On the other hand, if the navigation data has not been acquired (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not the navigation (notification of the stop operation) is necessary (S303). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 needs to navigate, for example, when a flag conversion lottery is performed on the main control board 71 or when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination on the main control board 71. Is determined. The result of the flag conversion lottery and the type of the internal winning combination are included in the start command data, and the sub CPU 81 can determine from the various information included in the start command data whether navigation is necessary. .

  If it is determined that the navigation is not necessary (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the sub navigation control processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that navigation is necessary (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets sub navigation data according to various lottery results (S304), and ends the sub navigation control processing. For example, the sub CPU 81 determines that the combination “F_Surely Lip” has been determined as the internal winning combination, and if the flag conversion lottery has been won, the navigation data for displaying the symbol combination of “triple chili lip” (For example, navigation data for aiming at a Chile symbol by pushing forward) is set, and if the role “F_Sure Chile Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the symbol “Replay” The navigation data for displaying the combination (for example, navigation data indicating a pressing order other than the forward pressing) is set. Thus, even when the main side does not report the details of the stop operation, the sub side can report the details of the stop operation alone.

<Player registration process>
Next, the player registration processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the player registration process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether a registration operation has been received (S311). For example, when a predetermined operation is received on the registration screen displayed when the operation of the registration button 212b is received on the menu screen 212 (see FIG. 29) of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration operation has been received. I do.

  If the registration operation has been received (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets a player registration state (S312). As will be described later, when the player registration state is set, the sub CPU 81 allows the first sub display device 201 to display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 (see FIG. 29). The display screen 201 is controlled.

  On the other hand, if a registration operation has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether a registration deletion operation has been received (S313). For example, when a specific operation is received on the registration screen of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that a registration deletion operation has been received. If the registration deletion operation has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the player registration process.

  On the other hand, when the registration deletion operation is received (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the player registration state. As will be described later, in a situation where the player registration state has been cleared, the sub CPU 81 disables the display of the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201 so as to disable the first sub display. The display screen of the device 201 is controlled.

<History management processing>
Next, the history management processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the history management processing, first, the sub CPU 81 acquires a game result from various command data received from the main control board 71 (S321). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the game history (S322), and ends the history management process. The sub CPU 81 can recognize the type of the combination determined as the internal winning combination from the start command data, for example, and can also determine the combination of the symbols displayed from the winning operation command data (that is, the combination determined as the internal winning combination). The winning of the role) can be grasped. Further, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the current gaming state and the transition state of the gaming state from the start command data, for example. From the game results obtained from the various command data, the sub CPU 81 determines, for example, various values such as the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, the number of games (the number of games), the number of CZs, the number of CZ successes, the number of winnings of each combination, and the winning probability. Game history can be managed.

[Switching of display screen of first sub display device]
Next, a method of switching the display screen of the first sub display device 201 in the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 (A) is a transition example of the display screen of the first sub display device 201 in a situation where the player registration state is not set, and FIG. 95 (B) is a state where the player registration state is set. It is a transition example of the display screen of the 1st sub-display apparatus 201 in a situation.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (A), in a situation where the player registration state is not set, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 81) changes the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 to the top screen 211 and the menu Control is performed so that transition can be made only between various display screens that can be transitioned from the screen 212 and the menu screen 212. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 performs the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 based on a touch operation (for example, a tap operation on a predetermined button or a swipe operation on a display screen) acquired via the touch sensor 201a. Switch the display screen between. On the other hand, when the player registration state is not set, the sub-control board 72 controls the display of the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 to be impossible. That is, in a situation where the player registration state is not set, the player cannot display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 on the first sub-display device 201.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), in a situation where the player registration state is set, the sub control board 72 changes the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 to the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212. In addition to various display screens that can be transitioned from the menu screen 212, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are controlled so that transition is possible. That is, the sub-control board 72 controls not only the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 but also the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 based on the touch operation acquired via the touch sensor 201a. As a result, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the player can display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 on the first sub-display device 201.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (B), the order of transition of the display screen among the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 is arbitrary. For example, the top screen 211 may be directly transitable to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, or the top screen 211 may be transitable to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 only via the menu screen 212. Good.

  In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not possible to directly transition from the top screen 211 to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 only through the menu screen 212. It is possible to transition to. More specifically, in the pachislo machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make a transition to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 by performing a swipe operation on the menu screen 212.

  Here, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 are not display screens provided with buttons corresponding to the menu screen 212, but are display screens provided completely independently of the menu screen 212. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, information indicating a result of a game in which a player has a strong interest during the game, such as a game history, is obtained from related information that is not related to the result of the game, such as a payout arrangement or volume control. Display independently. Then, in the pachislot machine 1, in a situation where the player registration state is set, it is possible to make a transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 without requiring a menu selection operation on the menu screen 212. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the situation where the player registration state is set, it is possible to easily access information (game history) that the player wants to check.

  On the other hand, it is not possible to transition to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 by a menu selection operation on the menu screen 212, and to transition to the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 without performing a swipe operation that is not included in the menu display. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an operation for transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be treated as a hidden command in a situation where the player registration state is set. For the player, his or her knowledge of the pachislot machine 1 allows the player to see a more detailed game history that cannot be seen by other players with little knowledge, and thus plays the game more advantageously than the other players. It can be played, and as a result, it can be expected that the game is actively played.

(Display of the top screen from the game information screen)
In the pachislot machine 1, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 transition to the top screen 211 manually or automatically by the player. Specifically, when the return button is operated on the game information screens 213, 214, 215, the display screen is changed from the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to the top screen 211 (manual transition). When a predetermined condition is satisfied while the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211 regardless of the operation of the player (automatic transition).

  More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the insertion operation (the operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1-bet button, and the insertion of the medal into the medal insertion slot 22). When an operation of inputting is performed, the screen automatically changes to the top screen 211. In addition, in a state in which the role related to the replay for performing the replay operation, such as the ART game state, has a high probability of being determined as the internal winning combination (high lip state), the medal is automatically activated by the replay operation according to the replay winning. As a result, in the high lip state, the opportunity to display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 may be limited. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, when medals are automatically inserted by the operation of the re-game, when the start operation is performed instead of the insertion of medals, the top screen is automatically changed from the game information screens 213, 214, and 215. Transition to 211.

  That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when a replay operation is being performed, when the start operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 automatically transition to the top screen 211, and the replay operation is performed. Is not performed, when an insertion operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are automatically transited to the top screen 211.

(Display of the top screen (or menu screen) from the display screen corresponding to the menu)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, a variety of display screens (registration screen, explanation screen, array payout screen, reach eye screen, WEB introduction screen, and volume adjustment screen) that can be changed by a menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 are displayed. The screen transits to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) manually or automatically. Specifically, when a predetermined button (for example, a top button) is operated on various display screens, the display screen is transited from the various display screens to the top screen 211, and a specific button (for example, , A return button), the display screen is transited from the various display screens to the menu screen 212 (manual transition). When a predetermined time elapses while various display screens are being displayed, the screen automatically transits to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) irrespective of the player's operation.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the time for transition to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is made different depending on the type of the display screen currently displayed. For example, if the volume adjustment screen for adjusting the volume output from the pachislot machine 1 is displayed for a long time, there is a possibility that the volume may be adjusted to an unintended volume by an erroneous operation. Since there is a possibility that the display screen may be shifted to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a shorter time than other display screens. On the other hand, the registration screen transits to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a longer time than other display screens in order to facilitate the registration of the player.

  That is, the time for transition to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is set in each of the various display screens, the time shorter than the other display screens is set in the volume adjustment screen, A longer time is set on the registration screen than on other display screens.

(Selection function of menu operation availability)
In the pachislot machine 1, the player transitions from the menu screen 212 to a registration screen, an explanation screen, an arrangement payout screen, a reach eye screen, a WEB introduction screen, and a volume adjustment screen, so that various types of screens corresponding to these various display screens are displayed. You can perform operations and check various information. Here, the functions that can be selected by the player may be restricted according to the settings of the game store.

  For example, the gaming shop can make it impossible for the player to adjust the volume by limiting the transition from the menu screen 212 to the volume control screen (for example, not displaying the volume button 212g on the menu screen 212). .

[Modification of First Embodiment]
The pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, a modified example of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described.

<CT Prediction Game and Notification Lottery During Normal ART>
In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when an advantageous state (for example, CT) is won, the next game is immediately shifted to the advantageous state. In the pachislot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, the advantageous control may not be performed immediately, but may be performed after performing a predetermined number of games. The predetermined number of games is called a precursor game. In the present modified example, for example, when the CT lottery is won during the normal ART, the pachislot machine 1 that does not immediately perform the CT but inserts a predetermined number of precursor games is described.

  As shown in FIG. 96 (A), during the normal ART, the CT random determination based on the internal winning combination is performed using the during-art CT random determination table (FIG. 61). If this CT lottery is won, the state shifts to a state of CT (additional chance zone) which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, until the CT is won, various lotteries for the CT lottery are performed on the main side (main control board 71). . Specifically, the main control board 71 performs an internal lottery to determine an internal winning combination, and at the same time, as the internal winning combination, a combination of “F_Clip Clip”, “F_1 Clip Clip”, “F_Reach Rep A” to “F_Reach Rep”. If any of "D" is determined, the flag conversion lottery is performed using the ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 58).

  On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present modified example, during the CT precursor after winning the CT lottery, the CT based on the combination after the flag conversion lottery (that is, the combination “triple lip lip” or the combination “reach eye lip”). It is assumed that a lottery, such as a lottery, to which a bonus is provided to a player is not performed. During the CT precursor, the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side (sub control board 72), and the notification content performed on the sub side is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side. For example, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, information for displaying the combination of the symbols of “reach eye lip” is displayed on the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, , The information for displaying the symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed on the display unit 100.

  As described above, in recent pachislot machines, it is required that the main side perform a lottery that affects the profit (payout) of the player, but in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, the lottery of the flag conversion lottery is performed. A period in which the result does not affect the player's profit at all (during CT precursor) is provided, and only during this period, flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side. Thus, for example, in a situation where the award of the benefit of the CT precursor is determined, it is possible to increase the chance of displaying a special symbol combination called “reach eye lip”, and increase the variation of how to show the symbol combination. Therefore, an improvement in playability can be expected.

  FIG. 96 (B) is a flag conversion lottery table during the CT precursor used in the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, which is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82. The flag conversion lottery table during the CT precursor specifies lottery value information on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the flag conversion lottery table during the CT precursor, during the CT precursor, the combination of “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is converted to the combination “reach eye lip” with a very high probability. I understand. As a result, if the combination of “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is determined as an internal winning combination during the CT precursor, a combination of the symbols of “reach eye lip” is displayed with a high probability. Thus, it is possible to indicate to the player that the game is in progress. It should be noted that if the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of “reach eye lip” is displayed, but no benefit is given.

  Of course, the flag conversion lottery during the CT precursor may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery on the sub side in a period in which the profit of the player is not affected at all as in the present modification, the main side can perform the lottery. This is preferable because the data capacity and processing load can be reduced.

<Another example of the push order for displaying triple lip>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, when the combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” are determined as the internal winning combination, when the answer is correct in the order of pressing, the combination of the symbol “Triple Chill Lip” is displayed, If the answer is incorrect, the combination of the symbols "Replay" is displayed (FIG. 47). Further, it is assumed that the pressing order of the correct answer to the role “F_Surely Chililip” is “forward push”.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, when the combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the types of symbol combinations displayed at the time of incorrect answer in the order of pressing are increased, and , The order of pushing the correct answer is made different for each of the roles “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip”.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), in the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, the role “F_Circumstance Clip” is such that the correct push order is “forward push (the first stop operation is performed on the left reel). 3L), and the incorrect push sequence is “middle press (first reel 3C for the first stop operation)” and “reverse press (first reel 3R for the right reel)”. In the case of the role "F_Sure Chili Lip", a combination of symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when the button is pushed forward, and a combination of symbols of "Replay" is displayed when the button is "middle pressed". Is displayed, the combination of the symbols of "two consecutive chili lip" is displayed.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, the role “F_1 probable crisp” is such that the correct push order is “reverse push” and the incorrect push order is “forward push” and “middle push”. And In the case of the role “F_1 Chillip”, a combination of symbols of “Triple Chilllip” is displayed when the button is pushed backward, and a symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed when the button is pressed “middle”, Is displayed, the combination of the symbols of "two consecutive chili lip" is displayed.

  In other words, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present modification, if any of the combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, “pressing forward” changes the type of the winning combination. Accordingly, “triple chililip” or “dual chililip” is displayed. Similarly, when “reversely pressed”, “triple chililip” or “dual chililip” is displayed depending on the type of the winning combination. . On the other hand, if any of the combination of “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Cty Chill Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, a “Replay” symbol combination when “middle pressed” regardless of the type of the winning combination Is displayed.

  By doing in this way, for example, when the combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, various navigations (notifications) for aiming at the Chile symbol become possible. Specifically, both “navigating a Chile symbol by pushing forward” and “navigating a Chile symbol by pushing backward” can be performed. If the role “F_Sure Chililip” is determined as the internal winning combination, “Navi for aiming at Chile symbol by pushing forward” is a navigation for displaying “3 consecutive Chililip”, "Navi for aiming at a Chile symbol" is a navigation for displaying "Triple chili lip" (a double chili lip is displayed). On the other hand, if the role “F_1 Sure Chili Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the “navigation to aim at the Chile symbol by pushing forward” is a navigation for not displaying the “3 consecutive Chili Lips”, "Navi for aiming at Chile symbols by pushing" is a navigation for displaying "triple chili lip" (dual chili lip is displayed).

  In the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, whether or not to perform these navigations is managed by the flag conversion random determination performed on the main side, and the navigation is performed under the control of the sub side based on the result of the flag conversion random determination on the main side. Is executed.

  FIG. 97 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the main-side flag conversion random determination during the normal ART and the sub-side navigation. During the normal ART, when the combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” are determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 performs a two-stage flag conversion lottery (see FIG. 58). On the sub side, the result of the two-stage flag conversion lottery is obtained from the start command data, and the navigation performed by the display unit 100 is determined based on the result of the two-stage flag conversion lottery.

  Specifically, when a non-winning is performed at the time of the first-stage flag conversion random determination in the two-stage flag conversion random determination, the sub-control board 72 performs “replay navigation”. In this “replay navigation”, the sub-control board 72 notifies the player to press the middle. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), the symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed at the time of the middle press, regardless of the combination of “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip”.

  In addition, when the first-stage flag conversion lottery among the two-stage flag conversion lottery is won and the second-stage flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub-control board 72 performs “Chili lip hunting navigation”. In this “Chili lip hunting navigation”, the sub-control board 72 informs the player to aim the Chile symbol by pushing in the reverse direction when the role “F_Sure Chili lip” is the internal winning combination, and the role “F_1 Sure Chili lip” is set inside. If it is a winning combination, a notification is made so that a Chile symbol can be aimed at by sequentially pushing. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), when the role “F_Sure Chill Lip” is pushed backward and the role “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” is pushed forward, the combination of the symbols “Dual Chill Lip” is displayed regardless of whichever. Will be.

  Further, when the first and second stages of the flag conversion lottery in the two stages of the flag conversion random determination are won, the sub-control board 72 performs the “Chili lip matching navigation”. In this “Chili lip matching navi”, the sub-control board 72 informs the player to aim at the Chile symbol by pushing forward when the role “F_Sure Chili Lip” is the internal winning combination, and the role “F_1 Sure Chili Lip” is set inside. In the case of the winning combination, a notification is made so that a Chile symbol can be aimed at by reverse pressing. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), when the role "F_Sure Chill Lip" is pushed forward and when the role "F_1 Sure Chill Lip" is pushed backward, the combination of the symbols of "Triple Chill Lip" is displayed. Will be.

  As described above, the notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery does not affect the profit (the flag conversion lottery itself affects the profit, but the combination of the symbols displayed as a result does not affect the profit). Is not given), the notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery is not performed on the main side (instruction monitor), but is performed only on the sub side (display unit 100). In this regard, as in the present modified example, by performing not only “Navigating in Chilelip” but also “Navigating in Chilelip”, navigation that does not affect profits can be performed in various ways on the sub side. Is improved.

[Effect of pachislot machine]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislo machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Management of duration during CT)
In the pachislot machine 1, a CT is provided as an additional chance zone for extending the duration of the normal ART, and the number of ART games is increased based on the internal winning combination during the CT. The CT is performed by eight games per set. If the number of ART games can be increased during CT, the number of games is not reduced, and the number of games is reduced only when the number of games cannot be increased. . From the viewpoint of the player, it is not known how long the CT will last, and the CT will not end as long as the addition is performed, so that the interest in the game during the CT can be enhanced.

  At this time, in the pachislot machine 1, if an additional is performed during the CT in accordance with the combination "3 consecutive chili lip", the game is reset eight times per set. With this, even if the CT is just before the end, the CT is restarted from the beginning by being added according to the role "3 consecutive chili lip", so that there is a strong interest in the game during the CT. The game can be continued without being bored, and the interest in the game during CT can be enhanced.

  In addition, the addition in accordance with the combination "3 consecutive chili lip" is performed only when the flag conversion lottery in the case where the combination "F_ sure chili lip" and "F_1 sure chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination is performed. Can be prevented from giving excessive profit to the player, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced. In the above-described pachislot machine 1, during the CT, the flag conversion lottery for the combination of “F_Probable Chililip” and “F_1 Probable Chililip” is guaranteed to be won (see FIG. 65). However, the winning probability is merely an example. This does not prevent the player and the game store from making appropriate adjustments in accordance with the balance of profits.

(Number of additional games based on the role "Triple Chililip" during CT)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, when the number of times of addition based on the role "triple chili lip" during CT exceeds a certain number, the number of games to be added per time is increased. As described above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT does not end, and the CT is reset when the role of "triple chili lip" is won. Can be expected to increase as the amount of addition increases per time, and the interest during CT improves. Also, the number of times that the amount of addition per game is increased is a number of times (9 or more) greater than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT, so that an excessive profit is provided to the player. It can be prevented from giving, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

(Bonus notification performed on the main side)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, it corresponds uniquely to the information of the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the combination of the bonus "10" (or "11") on the instruction monitor of the information display 14. By performing the display, the bonus notification is performed on the main side. Here, in the pachislot machine, the priority of the symbol to be drawn is usually set, and when the combination of the bonus and the other combination are determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of the bonus according to the priority is determined. There are cases where the combination of symbols depending on the pattern can be withdrawn, or cases where the combination cannot be withdrawn.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combination relating to the bonus and any one of “losing”, “F_special combination 1”, “F_special combination 2”, and “F_special combination 3” is determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, a combination of symbols according to the combination of the bonus can be drawn in. However, if another combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a combination of the symbols according to the combination of the bonus is drawn in. Can not. Therefore, in the case of the pachislot machine 1, the instruction is given only when the combination relating to the bonus and any one of “losing”, “F_special combination 1”, “F_special combination 2” and “F_special combination 3” are determined as the internal winning combination. "10" (or "11") is displayed on the monitor. Thus, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing at which the winning combination related to the bonus can be won.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, even if the role related to the bonus and any one of “losing”, “F_special role 1”, “F_special role 2”, and “F_special role 3” are determined as the internal winning combination, Until a predetermined number of games have elapsed since the winning of the role for the first time, "10" (or "11") is not displayed on the instruction monitor, and the instruction monitor is displayed on the condition that the predetermined number of games have elapsed. Is displayed as "10" (or "11").

  For example, an effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over a plurality of games may be performed in response to the winning of a role related to a bonus. During this continuous effect, “10” (or “ If it is displayed as "11"), the meaning of the continuous production is lost, and there is a possibility that interest may be spoiled. In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display on the instruction monitor is not performed until the predetermined number of games has elapsed, and the display is performed on the instruction monitor after the predetermined number of games has elapsed. The bonus can be notified on the main side without any loss.

(Notification performed on the main / sub side and notification on the sub side alone)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, a plurality of combinations having different combinations of symbols displayed according to the mode of the stop operation (push order) are provided (see FIG. 47). And the role of giving the same privilege even if the combination of displayed symbols is different.

  For example, the number of medals to be paid out is different when a combination of symbols "bell" is displayed and when a combination of symbols "bell spills" is displayed, and a combination of symbols "replay" is displayed. It is different from the case where the combination of the symbol of “RT2 shift lip” is displayed and whether the shift of the RT game state is performed in addition to the operation of the re-game, so that the role “F_3 selection bell_1st” or The role “F_maintenance lip_1st” is a role for giving a different privilege depending on a combination of displayed symbols. On the other hand, in the case where the combination of the symbols of “triple chili lip” is displayed and the case where the combination of the symbols of “replay” is displayed, only the replay operation is performed. Sure Chill Lip is a role that gives the same privilege even if the combination of displayed symbols is different (note that the role “F_Chill Clip” has different benefits depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery. , The combination of displayed symbols does not affect the privilege to be granted).

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combination that gives a different privilege depending on the combination of the displayed symbols is notified on both the main and sub sides, but is the same even if the combination of the displayed symbols is different. Is not notified on the instruction monitor on the main side, but is notified only on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Thus, while the notification affecting the privilege is appropriately performed on the instruction monitor on the main side that manages the privilege, the navigation that has no effect on the privilege can be performed with various navigations on the display unit 100 on the sub side. .

(Information lottery on the sub side)
Since the notification on the sub side at the time of winning the combination "F_Sure Chill Lip" is performed based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, the lottery (information notification lottery) on whether or not to perform the notification is performed on the main side. It is managed by. In other words, at the time of winning the winning combination "F_Definite Chili Lip", the privilege to be given differs depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery. Therefore, the flag conversion lottery is a lottery that affects the privilege and is strictly managed on the main side.

  On the other hand, the pachislot machine 1 may perform notification as an effect completely without affecting the privilege to be given. In such a case, the notification lottery itself as to whether or not to perform the notification is performed. Is performed on the sub side. For example, during the CT precursor, the award of the benefit of CT has already been determined, and it is possible to increase the chances of displaying a special symbol combination of “reach eye lip” (in contrast, if the benefit is not awarded, If it is displayed, it will not be displayed because the player will be dissatisfied.)

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when winning the role "F_reach-eye lip A to D" during the CT precursor, the sub side performs flag conversion lottery, and based on the lottery result, the combination of the symbol of "reach-eye lip" is determined. Notification for display is performed. Accordingly, in a situation where the award of the privilege, that is, during the CT precursor, is determined, the variation of the way of showing the combination of the symbols is increased, so that it is possible to expect the improvement of the gaming property. In addition, by performing the information lottery (flag conversion lottery) on the sub side during the period in which the privilege is not affected at all, the data capacity and the processing load on the main side can be reduced, which is preferable.

(How to display game history)
In the pachislot machine 1, a first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100, and various information useful for a player is displayed on the first sub-display device 201. For example, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a top screen 211 on the first sub-display device 201 showing an overview game history, a menu screen 212 on which various operations can be performed on the pachi-slot machine 1, and game information screens 213 and 214 showing detailed game history. , 215 are displayed. Further, the pachislot machine 1 registers a player who performs a game and provides a unique service to the player. For example, when the registration of the player is not received, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 representing the detailed game history are not displayed on the first sub-display device 201, but the registration of the player is received. In this case, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 representing the detailed game history are controlled to be displayed on the first sub-display device 201. Since it is possible to check a more detailed game history to improve the convenience of the player, the pachislot machine 1 can improve the convenience when the registration of the player is received.

  Here, the first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs effects, and the sub-control board 72 is connected to the first sub-display device 201 (and a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown)). The first sub-display 201 can be controlled separately from the display unit 100 because the second sub-display 202 is controlled and the display unit 100 is controlled via the accessory relay board (not shown). . Specifically, the display of the first sub-display device 201 can be switched even during a game (that is, during an effect on the display unit 100). From the viewpoint of the player, it is preferable to switch the display of the first sub-display device 201 during the game, so that various kinds of information can be acquired without disturbing the effect being performed on the display unit 100.

  In particular, as in the display unit 100 of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a planar image display is provided. When performing an effect using an image display having a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) and an effect using a curved image display, the effect of the effect can be significantly increased, but the effect such as a game history during the effect can be improved. Is not suitable for displaying extraneous information. In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since information not related to these effects is displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided separately from the display unit 100, the effect of the effects is not impaired. In addition, various information such as a game history can be appropriately displayed.

  By the way, in general, a pachislot machine is provided with a medal insertion slot on the right side as viewed from the player on the pedestal portion, and a bet button and a start lever are provided on the left side as viewed from the player. In this case, the player operates the right side or left side (side) of the pedestal portion.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 is provided on the side (right or left) of the surface that stands substantially perpendicularly from the pedestal portion 10, and the first sub-display device 201 is provided on the screen of the first sub-display device 201. A touch sensor 201a for switching the display of the sub display device 201 is provided. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 and an input device (touch sensor 201a) for controlling the display thereof are provided at a position where the player's hand is located during the game, and the operability of the player is improved. Is improved. In particular, since the first sub-display device 201 with the touch sensor 201a is provided on the surface of the pedestal portion 10 standing upright from the horizontal plane, the player can place the first sub-display device 201 on the pedestal portion 10 while placing his / her own hand. Since the device 201 can be operated, thereby improving not only the operability but also the fatigue caused by the operation, the operation rate can be expected to be improved.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a pachislot machine 1 according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The detailed description of the same configuration and control as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment is omitted.

[Gaming Flow of Pachislot Machine of Second Embodiment]
First, a game flow of the pachislo machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a transition flow of the gaming state regarding presence or absence of notification of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment. Comparing the transition flow of the gaming state of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 98 with the transition flow of the gaming state of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 33, the first embodiment and the second embodiment are basically the same. The game is played in the same flow, but during the ART gaming state, the game is played in a different flow. In other words, the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment differ greatly in the control of the CT during the ART gaming state.

  Specifically, in the pachislo machine 1 of the first embodiment, the CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination during the normal ART, and when the CT lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted to CT. On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that CT is set between MB flags in the ART gaming state. Note that the MB (role "F_MB") is a continuous differential device related to a so-called second-class special role, and in the pachislo machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 uses the MB as an internal winning combination. Once determined, the combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the corresponding symbol combination (combination “C_MB”) is displayed along the activated line.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, a normal ART is set between MB non-flags in the ART gaming state, and a CT is performed between MB flags in the ART gaming state. That is, in the second embodiment, when the MB is determined as the internal winning combination during the (H) normal ART, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state between the MB flags. Between MB flags in the ART gaming state, a game is performed so that the symbol combination related to MB is not displayed, and the main control board 71 performs CT during this period. A method of performing a game so that a combination of symbols corresponding to MBs is not displayed between MB flags is already known. For example, a method of aiming at a symbol in which a combination of symbols corresponding to MB is not displayed is aimed at. This can be realized by performing notification or notification of the pressing order without displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the MB.

  On the other hand, when the CT ends, the winning of the MB is prompted (notified), and (I) when a combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is displayed, the gaming state shifts from between the MB flags to the MB gaming state. Thereafter, when the condition for ending the (J) MB gaming state is satisfied, the gaming state shifts from the MB gaming state to the non-MB flag, and normal ART is performed.

<Characteristics of CT performed between MB flags>
Since the MB is carried over as the internal winning combination during the MB flag, it is possible to perform a stop control different from that during the non-MB flag. For example, if the predetermined small combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the middle of the MB flag and the non-MB flag, the internal winning combination is “MB + predetermined small” because the MB is carried over during the MB flag. However, since the MB has not been carried over during the non-MB flag, the internal winning combination is only “predetermined small combination”. In the pachislot machine, since the stop control is performed based on the internal winning combination, different stop control is performed between the MB flags and between the MB non-flags even if the same predetermined small combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Stop control can be performed based on the information, and as a result, the combination of symbols that can be displayed for a predetermined small combination can be different between MB flags and between non-MB flags.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, by making the stop control different between the middle of the MB flag and the middle of the non-MB flag, it is difficult to display (or not display) during the normal ART (during the non-MB flag). By displaying the combination of symbols during CT (between MB flags), various game characteristics are realized. Hereinafter, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be specifically described while focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

[Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the relationship between the internal winning combination and the displayed symbol combination in the pachislo machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment use different types of combinations and combinations of symbols, and therefore, this point will be described first.

(Types of roles used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles “F_Chililip”, “F_Clitical lip”, “F_1Clitical lip”, “F_Reach eye lip A” to “F_Reach eye lip D” are used. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the roles “R_single lip 1” to “F_triple lip 4” are used instead of these roles.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the combination of “F_3 alternative bell — 1st” to “F_3 alternative bell — 3rd” is used. On the other hand, in the pachislo machine 1 of the second embodiment, the roles “F_push-order bell 1” to “F_push-order bell 6” are used instead of these roles. In the following, the combinations “F_push-order bell 1” to “F_push-order bell 6” may be simply referred to as “push-order bell”. Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, a role related to MB which the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment does not have (role “F_MB”) is used. Note that other roles may be common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, or may be different, and a description thereof will be omitted.

(Types of combination of symbols used in the second embodiment)
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, a combination of symbols "bell", "bell spilling eyes", and "first appearance" is used as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd". Was used. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination of “F_Push order bell 1” to “F_Push order bell 6”, in addition to these symbol combinations, “MB” Use a combination of "cactus" symbols. The combination of the symbols “MB” may be arbitrary. Further, the combination of the symbols of “cactus” may be the same as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the number of medals paid out when displayed is the same as the combination of the symbols of “bell” (9 Sheets).

<Correspondence between winning combinations and stop symbols during MB non-flag>
FIG. 99 is a view showing the relationship between the internal winning combination between MB non-flags and the combination of symbols to be displayed. As shown in FIG. 99, during the non-MB flag, the roles “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” are roles in which the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, and the pressing order is “ In the case of "forward push", the symbol combination of "replay" is displayed along the activated line. On the other hand, when the pressing order is other than “forward pressing”, the combination of the symbols “Chili lip” is displayed along the activated line in the correct pressing order, and the combination of the symbols “Replay” in the incorrect pressing order is displayed. Is displayed.

  More specifically, in the combinations "F_Single Chile Lip 1" to "F_Single Chili Lip 4", in the case of the correct order of pushing for each role, a combination of symbols of "Single Chili Lip" is displayed. In the case of the order of pushing wrong answers for each role, a combination of symbols of “Replay” is displayed. In addition, in the combination of “F_2 double chili lip 1” to “F_2 double chili lip 4”, in the case of the correct push order for each role, a combination of symbols of “double chill lip” is displayed. In the case of an incorrect answer pressing order, a combination of symbols of “Replay” is displayed. In addition, in the combination of “F_3 consecutive chili lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chili lip 4”, in the case of the correct answering order for each combination, a combination of symbols of “3 consecutive chili lip” is displayed. In the case of an incorrect answer pressing order, a combination of symbols of “Replay” is displayed.

  Further, among the MB non-flags, the combination of the symbols “F_push-order bell 1” to “F_push-order bell 6” is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the order of the pushes. In the case of the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of "bell" is displayed. In the case of the pressing order of the incorrect answer for each role, the combination of the symbols of "bell spilling eyes" or "1st appearance" is displayed. Is displayed.

<Correspondence between winning combinations and stop symbols between MB flags>
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination between MB flags and the combination of symbols to be displayed. As shown in FIG. 100, in the MB flags, the combination of symbols “Chili Lip” is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pressing order of the combination “F_Single Chili Lip 1” to “F_Tri-Chili Lip 4”. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the combination “F_MB” and any of the combinations “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” are determined as the internal winning combination, the “til lip” Are displayed along the activated line.

  More specifically, in the combinations "F_Single Chile Lip 1" to "F_Single Chili Lip 4", a combination of symbols of "Single Chili Lip" is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pushing order, and the combination "F_2 Double Chili Lip 1" In the case of ~ F_2 double chili lip 4, the combination of the symbols of "2 twin chili lip" is displayed along the activated line regardless of the pushing order, and in the combination of "F_3 triple chili lip 1" to "F_3 triple chili lip 4," First, a combination of symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed along the activated line.

  Comparing FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, in the pachislo machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of “F_single lip 1” to “F_triple lip 4” is a symbol displayed according to the pressing order during the non-MB flag. While the combinations are different, the pressing order is not affected during the MB flag.

  Further, among the MB flags, the combination of the symbols “F_push-order bell 1” to “F_push-order bell 6” is a combination of different symbols displayed according to the order of the push, and is determined for each combination. According to the pressing order, a combination of symbols of "bell", "bell spilled or first roll", "cactus" and "MB" is displayed. Comparing FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, more combinations of symbols are displayed during the MB flag than during the non-MB flag during the winning combination “Push order bell”. be able to. Specifically, during the non-MB flag, a combination of symbols of “bell” and “bell spilled or one roll” is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, according to the pressing order. A combination of symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", and "bell spilled eyes or first roll" is displayed.

  As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” and the combination of “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” between MB flags Is different from the stop control for the combination “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” and the combination “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” during the MB non-flag.

[Game flow during normal ART]
Subsequently, a flow of a game during the normal ART of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations of the symbols “F_single lip 1” to “F_triple lip 4” are different depending on the pressing order. In the pachislot machine 1, when the combination of “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART, the flag conversion lottery is performed. Is displayed for displaying the symbol combination, and the number of ART games is added. On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying the combination of the symbols “replay” is performed without adding the ART game number.

  Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the additional amount of the number of ART games when the flag conversion lottery is won is determined based on the type of the hand determined as the internal winning hand. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the internal winning combination at the time of winning the flag conversion lottery is a combination of “F_single lip 1” to “F_single lip 4”, the least added amount is determined. In the case of "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4," the next smallest additional amount is determined, and in the case of the combination "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4," the largest additional amount is determined. I do. As described above, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols “Chili Lip” is performed. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the more the Chile symbols are displayed, the larger the additional amount is. Become.

[Data table during normal ART]
Next, a data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS. The data tables shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<ART conversion flag lottery table>
FIG. 101 is an ART flag conversion random determination table used for flag conversion random determination performed during normal ART according to the second embodiment. The ART conversion flag lottery table defines information on a lottery value regarding the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the lottery state. The ART level is information controlled in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the lottery state is information controlled in the same manner as in the CT lottery state in the first embodiment.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 uses the ART flag conversion lottery table to convert the combination of “F_single lip 1” to “F_triple lip 4” into the role “til lip”. Whether or not is determined by lottery (flag conversion lottery). Then, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the push order of the correct answer for each winning combination via the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, The sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order of incorrect answers for each winning combination via the display unit 100.

<Additional lottery table during normal ART>
Next, FIG. 102 is a normal ART additional lottery table used for additional lottery for increasing the number of ART games performed during the normal ART according to the second embodiment. In the normal ART addition lottery table, information on the lottery value regarding the lottery result of the additional lottery is defined in association with the internal winning combination.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the main control board 71 wins the flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 performs the additional lottery using the normal ART additional lottery table. The number of added games is added (added to the ART end game number counter). In the drawing, the information of the lottery value associated with the winning combination “single chili lip” is such that the internal winning combinations when the flag conversion lottery is won are the combinations “F_single chili lip 1” to “F_single chili lip 4”. The information of the lottery value that is referred to in the case and is associated with the winning combination “two consecutive chili lip” is such that the internal winning combination at the time of winning the flag conversion lottery is a combination of “F_2 consecutive chili lip 1” to “F_2 consecutive chili lip 4”. The lottery value information that is referred to in a certain case and is associated with the winning combination “triple chili lip” is such that the internal winning combination at the time of winning the flag conversion lottery is a combination of “F_3-triple-lip 1” to “F_3-triple-lip 4”. It is referred when it is.

[Game flow during CT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a flow of a game during the CT of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the method of managing the duration of CT. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the duration of the CT by eight games per set, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, The control board 71 determines the duration of the CT based on the number of medals paid out during the CT (more specifically, the so-called “difference number” obtained by subtracting the “number of medals used in the game” from the “number of medals paid out”). Manage.

  Specifically, the main control board 71 ends the CT when the difference number during the CT reaches the end number (50) (for example, performs notification for winning the MB at the time of winning the role "push order bell"). ). Here, when the symbol combination of "bell" and "cactus" is displayed, nine medals are paid out. Therefore, if the symbol combination of "bell" is displayed during CT (more specifically, CT If the flag conversion lottery is not won during this period), the difference number (six) of the increased duration of the CT is consumed. On the other hand, when the combination of the symbols “cactus” is displayed during the CT (more specifically, when the flag conversion lottery is won during the CT), in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, Maintain the duration of the CT.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 103A, the main control board 71 performs flag conversion lottery when the combination “push order bell” is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 change the pressing order in which the combination of the symbols of "cactus" is displayed for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the notification is made and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combination of the symbol "bell" is displayed on the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the pressing order.

  Then, when the combination of the symbols "bell" or "cactus" is displayed, the main control board 71 increases the difference number by six to finish the duration of CT, but wins the flag conversion lottery. In this case, the main control board 71 adds six sheets to the number of CT end sheets as well as the number of difference sheets. As a result, although the number of differences in CT has increased by six in accordance with the display of the symbol combination of "cactus", the number of end CTs has also increased by six. Will be maintained.

  This flag conversion lottery is performed based on the value of the CT meter. That is, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), in the pachislo machine 1 of the second embodiment, a plurality of stages of CT meters from “1” to “MAX” are provided, and the lower the CT meter, the more the flag conversion lottery is won. The probability is reduced, and the higher the CT meter, the higher the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery.

  This CT meter is promoted or demoted based on the result of the game during CT. That is, when the combination of “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT, the main control board 71 promotes the CT meter with a predetermined probability. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the main control board 71 determines that the combination “F_single lip 1” to “F_single lip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. If the CT meter is promoted with a probability and the combination of “F_2 consecutive chili lip 1” to “F_2 consecutive chili lip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during the CT, the CT meter is promoted with the next lower probability and the role is performed during the CT. When “F_3 consecutive lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” are determined as internal winning combinations, the CT meter is promoted with the highest probability.

  Further, when the main control board 71 does not win the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the combination “push order bell” during CT, it demotes the CT meter. When the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 may demote the CT meter with a predetermined probability or may demote the CT meter without fail.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, if the combination of “F_single lip 1” to “F_triple lip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT, the number of ART games is increased. The additional amount of the ART game number varies depending on the number of displayed Chile symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the main control board 71 performs the role “F_Single Chile Lip 1” during CT. When "F_Single Chile Lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the least additional amount is determined, and during CT, the roles "F_2 consecutive Chili Lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive Chili Lip 4" are determined as the internal winning combination. And the next smallest additional amount is determined. If the combination of “F_3 consecutive lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during CT, the largest additional amount is determined.

[Data table during CT]
Next, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. The data tables shown in FIGS. 104 to 106 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CT conversion flag lottery table>
FIG. 104 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion random determination performed during CT according to the second embodiment. The during-CT flag conversion lottery table defines information on a lottery value regarding the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination and the CT meter.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 converts the combination of “F_push order bell 1” to “F_push order bell 6” into “cactus” using the ART flag conversion lottery table. Whether or not is determined by lottery (flag conversion lottery). Then, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 display the combination of the symbol "cactus" for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the pressing order is notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 use the combination of the symbol "bell" for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. The pressing order for displaying is notified.

  Here, referring to FIG. 104, it is understood that the higher the value of the CT meter, the easier the flag conversion lottery during CT is to be won, and when the CT meter is “MAX”, the flag conversion lottery is always won. You can see that. If the flag conversion lottery is won, the CT continuation period is maintained. Therefore, when the CT meter is “MAX”, the CT continues without ending. Note that since the profit given to the player becomes excessive if the CT is not completed, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing when the CT meter becomes “MAX”. May be provided, and both the demoting of the CT meter and the upper limit of the number of finished CT meters may be applied.

  When demoting a CT meter, if it is demoted immediately after being promoted to "MAX", the interest of the player will be spoiled. Therefore, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing after the CT meter becomes “MAX”. Here, since the CT meter is provided in eight stages of "1" to "MAX", for example, the CT meter is demoted after eight games have been played since the CT meter became "MAX". Alternatively, the CT meter may be demoted after the flag conversion lottery is performed eight times after the CT meter becomes “MAX”. Further, the value of the CT meter after the demotion is arbitrary, for example, it may be downgraded to the CT meter “1”, or may be downgraded to the CT meter “7”, or the CT meter “1”. The value of the demotion destination may be determined by lottery from among “” to “7”.

<CT meter promotion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 105 is a CT meter promotion lottery table during CT used for CT meter promotion lottery performed during CT according to the second embodiment. The CT meter promotion lottery table during CT defines the information of the lottery value of the result of the promotion lottery of the CT meter in association with the current value of the CT meter and the internal winning combination.

  Referring to FIG. 105, the probability of winning the promotion lottery of the CT meter is the lowest in the combination “F_single lip 1” to “F_single lip 4”, and the combination “F_2 double tie 1” to “F_2 double lip 4”. Next, it is found that the roles “F_3 consecutive chili lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chili lip 4” are the highest. In the pachislo machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CT meter is promoted one step at a time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of stages may be promoted at a time.

<Additional lottery table during CT>
Next, FIG. 106 is a CT addition lottery table used for additional lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during CT according to the second embodiment. The extra lottery table during CT defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery using the additional lottery table during CT, and when the additional lottery is won, adds the corresponding additional game number (ART end). Add to game counter).

  Referring to FIG. 106, the additional amount of the number of ART games during the CT is the smallest in the combinations “F_single lip 1” to “F_single lip 4”, and the combinations “F_2 double tie 1” to “F_2 double lip 4”. It can be seen that the number of the roles is the second lowest, and the number of the roles “F_3 consecutive Chili Lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chili Lip 4” is the highest. More specifically, in the roles “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_Single Chile Lip 4” in which one Chile symbol is displayed, the number of ART games of 10 games or more is added, and two Chile symbols are displayed. In "F_2 double chili lip 1" to "F_2 double chili lip 4", the number of ART games of 20 or more games is added and three chile symbols are displayed. In the roles "F_3 triple chili lip 1" to "F_3 triple chili lip 4," 30 or more ART games are added. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the number of ART games is added according to the number of dust symbols displayed during CT.

[Game flow during CZ]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a flow of a game in the CZ of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment has CZs 1, 2, and 3 as CZs, like the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the game flow of CZ3 is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the game flow of CZ1, 2 is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. different.

  Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 are divided into a first half and a second half, and ranks (modes and points) having different expectations for ART lottery in the first half are promoted. In the latter half, the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by a battle effect (see FIG. 50). As shown in FIG. 107, such a basic flow in the CZs 1 and 2 is the same in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

  On the other hand, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment differs greatly from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the end condition of the first half. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first half of the CZ1 and CZ2 is ended based on the number of continuous games, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first half of the CZ1 is completed based on the number of continuous games. The CZ2 ends the first half based on the result of the end lottery. In addition, in both CZ1 and CZ2, the lock lottery is performed in the first half, and when the lock lottery is won, the first half of CZ1 and CZ2 is ended.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107A, in the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a rank-up lottery every game. This rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 53), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a lock lottery for each game. The lock lottery is a process of randomly determining whether to perform a game lock based on an internal winning combination. Then, when the lock lottery is won, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ1 and performs a game lock (for example, delays the rotation start when the reel rotation starts). On the other hand, when the lock lottery is not won, the main control board 71 continues the first half of CZ1 without ending the first half of CZ1 until 15 games have elapsed.

  Then, when the first half of CZ1 has passed 15 games or won the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of CZ1 and shifts to the second half. In the second half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs an ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up random determination of the first half. This ART lottery is also the same as in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55 (A) and (C)), and therefore detailed description is omitted. However, when the main control board 71 has won the lock lottery, Always win the ART lottery. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state when the ART lottery is not won, and shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state via ART preparation during the ART lottery winning. .

  On the other hand, in the first half of CZ2, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the main control board 71 performs a rank-up lottery every game. This rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 54), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the main control board 71 performs the end lottery for each game in the first half of CZ1, and when this end lottery is won, the first half of CZ1 ends and the process shifts to the second half. In the case of a winning, the first half of CZ1 is continued.

  In the first half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs a lock lottery every game. When the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of CZ2 and performs a game lock. On the other hand, when the lock lottery is not won, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of the CZ2 but continues the first half of the CZ2 until the end lottery is won.

  Then, when the end lottery or the lock lottery is won, the main control board 71 ends the first half of CZ2 and shifts to the second half. In the second half of the CZ2, the main control board 71 performs the ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery of the first half. The ART lottery is also the same as in the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55 (B) and (C)), and therefore detailed description is omitted. However, when the main control board 71 has won the lock lottery, Always win the ART lottery. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the normal gaming state when the ART lottery is not won, and shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state via ART preparation during the ART lottery winning. .

  As described above, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that a lock lottery is performed for each game in the first half of the CZ1 and CZ2. Further, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the end condition of the first half of the CZ2 is not the number of continuous games but the end lottery.

[Data table in CZ]
Next, a data table used during CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. The data tables shown in FIGS. 108 and 109 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CZ2 end lottery table>
FIG. 108 is a CZ2 end lottery table used for end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment. The CZ2 end lottery table defines information on a lottery value for the lottery result of the end lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

  Referring to FIG. 108, in the first half of the CZ2 of the second embodiment, when the combination “Replay” is determined as the internal winning combination, the end lottery is performed, and the end lottery may be won with a high probability. I understand. In addition, since CZ2 is basically performed during the RT0 to RT3 gaming state, the combination "replay" is any of the combinations "F_maintenance lip A" to "F_RT4 lip_3rd". In the pachislot machine, the replay is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of at least a predetermined value (approximately 1 / 7.3). Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first half of the CZ2 ends. It turns out that it occurs relatively frequently.

<Lock lottery table>
Next, FIG. 109 is a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1 and CZ1 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 109 (A) is a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1. FIG. 109 (B) is a lock lottery table used for lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2. The lock lottery table defines information on a lottery value regarding the lottery result of the lock lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

  Comparing FIGS. 109 (A) and (B), it can be seen that the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 wins with a higher probability than the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the first half of CZ1 ends when the predetermined number of games (15 games) elapses, while the first half of CZ2 ends when the end lottery is won. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, rank-up random determination is performed. When the first half of CZ1 and CZ2 is completed, ART random determination is performed based on the result of the rank-up random determination. Therefore, it can be said that CZ1 is a chance zone in which ART lottery timing is fixed, and CZ2 is a chance zone in which ART lottery timing is indefinite.

  In addition, the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 is performed when the winning combination “Replay” to be won with a relatively high probability is determined as the internal winning combination, so the rank-up lottery is performed in CZ2 as compared with CZ1. Opportunities are likely to be reduced. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, lock lottery is performed in the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, and the probability of winning the lock lottery is higher in CZ2 than in CZ1. As a result, even in the case of CZ2 in which the chance of receiving a rank-up lottery is likely to be reduced, it is possible to expect to shift to ART.

[Modification of Second Embodiment]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described above. Next, a modified example of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game and notification lottery>
In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when the transition between the MB flags during the normal ART, the transition from the next game to the CT is immediately performed. After that, a predetermined number of precursor games may be inserted.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), when the MB is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the non-MB flag to the MB flag. During the normal ART (while the MB is not flagged), the number of ART games is added when the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the combination “F_single lip 1” to “F_triple lip 4” is performed (see FIG. 102). The flag conversion random determination up to the transition between the MB flags is performed on the main side (main control board 71) because it affects the privilege given to the player.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the combination of the symbols “Chili lip” is always displayed regardless of the pushing order between the MB flags, if it is decided to perform the precursor game between the MB flags, From the stop control (combination of symbols to be displayed), the player may know that a precursor game is being played. For example, as shown in FIG. 99, during the MB non-flag, the combination of the symbols “Chili Lip” is not displayed by sequentially pressing the combination “F_Single Chili Lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chili Lip 4” when winning. If the combination of the symbols "Chili lip" is displayed by the forward push, the player will know that the MB flag is in the middle (beginning game).

  Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, when the combination “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flags, the pressing order is notified. As described above, when the combination of “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 2” is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flags, the symbol combination of “til lip” is displayed regardless of the pressing order. However, when the pressing order is notified, the player recognizes that the combination of the symbols “Chili Lip” has been displayed according to the notified pressing order, and determines that the player is in the middle of the MB flag. It can be difficult to grasp.

  Since the notification of the pressing order does not affect the profit of the player at all, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present modified example, it is determined whether or not the pressing order is notified during the MB flag. The lottery is performed on the sub (sub-control board 72) side. Of course, the notification lottery during the MB flag may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery that does not affect the profit of the player at all on the sub side as in the present modified example, the data capacity on the main side is obtained. This can reduce the processing load and is preferable.

  FIG. 110 (B) is a notification lottery table during the CT precursor used for the notification lottery performed on the sub side, which is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82. The notification lottery table during the CT precursor specifies information on a lottery value regarding the lottery result of the notification lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination.

  When the notification lottery using the notification lottery table during the CT precursor is won, the sub control board 72 notifies the display unit 100 of an arbitrary pressing order other than the forward pressing.

<Navigation at the time of winning the bell in the order of pressing between the MB flags>
In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, when the combination "push order bell" is won between MB flags, more types of symbol combinations are displayed than during MB non-flag. Specifically, while the MB non-flag is displayed, the combination of the symbols "bell" and "bell spilled or the first roll" is displayed in accordance with the pressing order, while "MB" is displayed in accordance with the pressing order during the MB flag. A combination of symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", and "bell spilled eyes or first roll" is displayed. In the pachislo machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the pressing order necessary to display a combination of "cactus" symbols that can be displayed only between MB flags is reported during CT between MB flags. .

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present modified example, when a winning combination “push order bell” is won between MB flags, the notification content is made different depending on the state up to the start of the MB.

  Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when MB is determined as an internal winning combination during normal ART, the gaming state shifts between MB flags, and thereafter, CT is performed. In this case, in the pachislot machine 1 in which a predetermined number of precursor games are sandwiched after the transition between the MB flags, the state between the MB flags is divided into a “precursor game” state, a “CT” state, and a “MB waiting” state. be able to.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, when an MB is won during the normal ART, the state is changed to a “precursor game” state between MB flags, and thereafter, when a predetermined number of predictive games are performed and CT starts, The state becomes the “CT” state during the period between the MB flags, and when the CT ends, the state becomes the “MB waiting state” until the MB wins.

  In the pachislo machine 1 of this modification, the notification content at the time of winning the combination "push order bell" is made different depending on the state between these MB flags. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, in the “aura game” state, a combination of symbols of “bell” is displayed on the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the pressing order. In the “CT” state, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the symbol combination of “bell” or “cactus” is displayed via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. That is, in the “CT” state, the pressing order according to either “bell” or “cactus” is notified based on the result of the flag conversion lottery based on the CT meter as described above.

  In the “MB standby state” after the end of the CT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify an arbitrary combination of symbols via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. For example, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 may notify the pressing order in which the combination of the symbols "bell" is displayed, and the pressing order in which the combination of the symbols "cactus" is displayed. The pressing order in which the symbol combination of “MB” is displayed may be notified.

  On the other hand, during the normal ART, the combination of the symbols "cactus" cannot be displayed, so that the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the combination of the symbols "bell" is displayed.

[Effects of Pachislot Machine of Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislo machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Combinations of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags)
In the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, more combinations of symbols can be displayed during an MB flag than during an MB non-flag when a winning combination “push order bell” is won. Specifically, during the non-MB flag, a combination of symbols of “bell” and “bell spilled or one roll” is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flag, according to the pressing order. A combination of symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", and "bell spilled eyes or first roll" is displayed.

  As a result, the number of combinations of symbols displayed between the MB flags can be increased without increasing the number of winning combinations, and a variety of games can be provided between the MB flags. Specifically, a combination of symbols of “cactus” corresponding to a so-called rare combination can be displayed between MB flags, and the appearance frequency of the rare combination can be changed without changing the type of the winning combination and the winning probability. Can be increased. In particular, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning the combination "push order bell" is changed, the appearance frequency of the rare combination with a medal payout can be increased.

  If a combination of "cactus" symbols is continuously displayed between the MB flags, it is known that the combination is between the MB flags. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, a combination of symbols of "cactus" is notified only when the flag conversion lottery is won, and a combination of symbols of "bell" is notified in the case of non-winning. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the current state, which is preferable. Also, by controlling the content of the notification by the flag conversion lottery, the frequency of the symbol combination (rare combination) of “cactus” between the MB flags can be adjusted, and the gambling between the MB flags can be diversified. Can be.

(Playability during CT)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, a CT which is an additional chance zone for increasing the number of ART games is performed between the MB flags. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CT that continues until the difference number reaches the end number (50) during the MB flag is performed. During this CT, if the winning combination "Push order bell" is won, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the difference number increases and the duration of CT is consumed, while if the flag conversion lottery is won, the difference number increases and the end number increases. Increase and the duration of CT is maintained. Thereby, in the pachislo machine 1 of the second embodiment, the continuation of the CT is performed according to the combination of the displayed symbols (specifically, according to the result of the flag conversion lottery) while changing the stop control between the MB flags. Since the period can be controlled, it is possible to diversify the playability between the MB flags.

  At this time, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the value of the CT meter, so that the duration of CT is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter. Can be. In addition, this CT meter is promoted when the combination “F_Single Chile Lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive Chile Lip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT, and is demoted when the lottery between flags is not won during CT. The player has a strong interest in the result of the game during the CT, and can diversify the playability between the MB flags.

  In particular, if the CT meter can be promoted to “MAX”, the flag conversion lottery will always be won for a predetermined period, so that it is possible to have an expectation for the subsequent game, and to enjoy the game. Is improved.

(Combinations of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags and between non-MB flags)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of symbols displayed at the time of winning the combination “push order bell” differs between the middle of the MB flag and the middle of the non-MB flag, and the combination of the combination “F_ The combinations of the symbols displayed at the time of winning the “1” to “F — 3 consecutive chili lip” are also different. In other words, while the MB non-flag is being displayed, the symbol combination of “Replay” or “Chili lip” is displayed according to the pressing order, while the symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed during the MB flag. Only the combination of the symbol "Chili Lip" is displayed.

  In the pachislo machine 1 of the second embodiment, the flag conversion lottery is performed both during the period between the MB flags and during the period between the non-MB flags. The flag conversion lottery between the MB flags is to randomly select an object to be notified at the time of winning the combination “push order bell” from a combination of symbols of “bell” or “cactus”. In the flag conversion lottery, a target to be notified at the time of winning the combination of “F_single lip 1” to “F_triple lip” is randomly selected from combinations of symbols of “replay” or “til lip”. In this way, by performing the flag conversion lottery both during the period between the MB flags and during the period between the non-MB flags, it is possible to control the combination of the symbols to be displayed both between the MB flags and between the non-MB flags. It is possible to enhance the playability between both flags and between non-flags.

  At this time, in the flag conversion lottery between the MB flags, the winning probability is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter, and in the flag conversion lottery during the non-MB flag, the winning probability is adjusted based on the ART level and the lottery state. You. Thereby, each lottery can be managed in its own mode, and the gaming ability based on the flag conversion lottery is improved.

(Information lottery on the sub side)
Since the stop control is different between the middle of the MB flag and the middle of the non-MB flag, the combination of the displayed symbols may indicate that the middle of the MB flag is present. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the notification of the unnecessary pressing order is intentionally performed during the MB flag, so that it is difficult to grasp that it is during the MB flag. By managing the notification of the pressing order on the sub side, the data capacity and processing load on the main side can be reduced.

[Modification]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(Bell navigator between flags and non-flag bell navigator)
For example, in the pachislo machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the main monitor is notified by displaying a numerical value uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor. Note that the manner of notification on the main side is basically the same in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and FIG. 74 of the first embodiment shows an example thereof. Here, in FIG. 74, while "white 7 navigation" and "blue 7 navigation" are performed during the inter-flag state, "bell navigation" and the like are not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. “Bell navigating” or the like may be performed during the state.

  In this case, the numerical value displayed on the instruction monitor may be different between the state between the flags and the state between the non-flags. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 74 (A) and (B), when performing “Bell Navi” in the non-flag state, the instruction monitor displays numerical values of “1” to “3” (pressing order second instruction information ), While performing “Bell Navi” in the inter-flag state, as shown in FIG. 112, displaying the numerical values of “12” to “14” on the instruction monitor (first instruction information of the pressing sequence). It may be. The navigation on the sub side performed via the display unit 100 may be common to both the inter-flag state and the non-flag state. The same applies to the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, in which the numerical value when performing “Bell Navi” between MB non-flags and the numerical value when performing “Bell Navi” during MB flags are different. It may be.

  In the pachislo machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, whether or not to give a privilege is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the pachislo machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification content is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, and the combination of the symbols displayed when the result and the notification stop operation are performed is determined. Will be different. Therefore, the main control board 71 may give the privilege based on the combination of the actually displayed symbols.

  In this case, the main control board 71 gives a privilege based on the combination of symbols displayed based on the notification performed in accordance with the result of the flag conversion lottery, and based on the combination of symbols displayed without following the notification. May not be granted. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different. Therefore, when the player ignores the notification and performs the stop operation, There is a possibility that a special symbol combination such as "triple chili lip" will be displayed. However, even if a special symbol combination is displayed as a result of ignoring the notification, the privilege is provided only when the special symbol combination is displayed as a result of following the notification without giving the privilege. It may be that.

(Control of notification that does not affect profits (privileges))
In the pachislo machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, for the notification affecting the profit, the main side performs a notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) and controls whether the main side performs the notification. For the notification that does not affect the profit, the sub-side performs the information random determination and controls whether or not to perform the notification on the sub-side. As an example of the notification that does not affect the profit, the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment shows a notification of “reach eye lip” during a precursor game, and the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment This shows the notification of “Chili Lip” between the MB flags. In this regard, the notification that does not affect the profit is not limited to these.

  In recent pachislot machines, a transition may be made to a state in which a game lock is easy (difficult) to perform in accordance with the order of the stop operation. For example, when the order of pressing “left, middle, right” is changed to a state where the game lock is easily performed, and when the order of pressing “right, middle, left” is changed, the state is changed to a state where it is difficult to perform the game lock. There is. In such a pachislo machine, by notifying the pressing order, the game lock is shifted to an easy (difficult) state. However, if the game lock or not affects the profit, On the other hand, if the notification needs to be controlled on the main side, but whether or not the game lock is performed does not affect the profit, the notification may be controlled on the sub side.

  The case where whether or not the game lock is performed has an effect on the profit is, for example, a case where the game lock is performed as in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment and the ART lottery is won. (See FIG. 107). On the other hand, the case where whether or not the game lock is performed does not affect the profit is a case where the game lock is performed as an effect. For example, during a precursor game in which it is determined that a profit (privilege) is to be provided. By performing the game lock frequently, it is intended to show that a profit will be given in the subsequent game.

  FIG. 113A is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between the pressing order and the locked state. In the example shown in FIG. 113A, when a stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “left, middle, right” at the time of winning the combination “F_Maintain Lip A”, the lock state changes from “0” to “1”. When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “left, right, middle”, “middle, left, right”, “middle, right, left”, the current locked state is maintained, and “right, left, middle”, “right” When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “, middle, left”, the lock state changes from “1” to “0”. Similarly, when the winning combination “F_maintenance lip B” is won, when the stop operation is performed in the first pressing order, the lock state changes from “0” to “1” and the locking state changes in the second pressing order. When the stop operation is performed, the locked state is maintained, and when the stop operation is performed in the third pressing order, the locked state changes from “1” to “0”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 113 (A), for the sake of simplicity, the locked state “0” is set to a state where it is difficult to lock the game, and the locked state “1” is set to a state where the game lock is easily set. Of course, the lock state is not limited to two stages, but may be three or more stages. In the case of three or more stages, instead of transitioning one stage at a time, multiple stages may be transitioned at once.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), when the game lock affects the profit, the main lot (main control board 71) performs notification lottery as to whether or not to perform the notification, and the lottery result is displayed. On the basis of this, both the main side and the sub side notify the predetermined pressing order. On the other hand, when the game lock does not affect the profit, the sub-sub (sub-control board 72) performs the notification lottery as to whether or not to perform the notification, and based on the lottery result, determines the predetermined pressing order on the sub side. Notify.

  Note that, depending on the pachislot machine, there is a pachislot machine where the game lock affects the profit over the entire period of the game, while there is a pachislot machine where the game lock does not affect the profit over the entire period of the game, and There are some pachislot machines where the game lock affects the profit during a predetermined period, but does not affect the profit during a specific period of the game. For this reason, in the pachislot machine 1, during the period in which the game lock affects the profit, a notification lottery on whether or not to perform the notification is performed on the main side, and based on the lottery result, a predetermined push is performed on both the main side and the sub side. While the order is notified, during the period in which the game lock affects the profit, the sub-side performs a notification lottery as to whether or not to perform the notification, and the sub-side notifies a predetermined pressing order based on the lottery result. It may be.

  Since the game lock is normally performed by the main control board 71, the main control board 71 has a function of shifting the lock state according to the pressing order shown in FIG. 113 (A). That is, the main control board 71 randomly determines whether or not to perform the game lock at a probability according to the lock state set by the lock state setting means, which sets the lock state based on the detected order of the stop operation. When the game lock determination means determines that the game lock is to be performed, the game lock determination means functions as a lock execution means for temporarily stopping the progress of the game. Then, the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 performs a notification lottery means for performing a notification lottery as to whether or not to notify a pressing order in which the lock state setting means sets a lock state in which the game lock is easy (difficult) to perform. , And functions as a notifying means for notifying a predetermined pressing order based on the lottery result of the notifying lottery means.

(Normal ART and CT termination conditions)
The termination conditions of the normal ART and CT are not limited to those described above, and any termination conditions can be adopted. For example, the number of medals awarded during the normal ART or CT, the number of unit games during the normal ART or CT, the number of times information is notified to the player during the normal ART or CT, the predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) ) Is one set, an arbitrary end condition such as the number of sets, the continuation rate at the end of one set, or the like can be adopted.

  In addition, as the number of medals given during the normal ART or CT, for example, a difference number (net increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of medals used for the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game is used. It may be. Further, the number of medals awarded during the normal ART or CT may be calculated based on the actually increased medals (calculation based on actual values), and may be notified regardless of whether or not the medals are actually increased. (The calculation based on the ideal value). Further, the number of awarded medals may not be increased depending on the type of the internal winning combination. For example, with respect to some of the combinations that have a low probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, or a combination in which the display / non-display of a combination of symbols is switched according to the timing of the stop operation, the combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Alternatively, the number of awarded medals may not be increased or decreased.

(Type of notification (push order, timing))
In addition, the content of the notification performed during the normal ART or CT is also arbitrary, and the order of the stop operation (push order) in which a combination of symbols advantageous to the player is displayed may be notified. May be notified of the timing of the stop operation (the symbol to be aimed at) necessary to display.

(Other)
In addition, as the advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the replay is not changed (or is changed within a range that does not affect the playability), and the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. In addition, a so-called “AT” may be used. In addition, a replay high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the replay is increased, and a stop operation advantageous to the player is performed. A so-called “ART” that notifies the mode may be used.

  Further, in the above-described pachislot machine 1, various display screens are displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided on the left side of the pedestal portion 10 (the MAX bet button 11 and the start lever 6 side). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various display screens may be displayed on the second sub-display device 202 provided on the right side of the pedestal unit 10 (on the medal insertion slot 22 side). Similarly, a touch sensor may be provided on the display surface of the second sub display device 202, and the display screen of the second sub display device 202 may be switched based on touch input information output from the touch sensor.

[Various functions of main control board and sub control board]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. Next, various functions of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 will be described.

  The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, and thus includes a start operation detecting unit, a symbol changing unit, an internal winning combination determining unit, a stop operation detecting unit, a reel It functions as stop control means and winning determination means.

  In addition, when the combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” and “F_1 Sure Chill Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART, the main control board 71 performs the flag conversion lottery and the result of the flag conversion lottery and other internal winnings. When the winning of the CT lottery based on the winning combination is started, a CT for extending the duration of the normal ART is started, so that it functions as a conversion lottery means and an additional game start means.

In addition, the main control board 71 adds (extends) the number of ART games indicating the duration of the normal ART according to the internal winning combination during CT. Specifically, the number of ART games of the normal ART is added by a predetermined amount according to the role "cactus", "weak cherry", and "strong cherry", and the number of the ART games of the normal ART is specified amount according to the role "triple chili lip". Add to it.
At this time, the main control board 71 determines that the number of times that the number of ART games based on the role "3 consecutive chili lip" has been added becomes 9 or more, which is more than 8 times corresponding to one set of CT, and the number of times per game is increased. Functions as additional control means to increase the additional amount

  The main control board 71 counts the number of games in which the number of ART games is not added during the CT using the CT game number counter, and terminates the CT when the CT game number counter has counted 8. At this time, the main control board 71 sets the value of the CT game number counter to the initial value because the game of 8 times per set is reset when the combination “3 consecutive chili lip” is won (ie, the flag conversion lottery is won). Return), function as counting means and additional game ending means.

  When the combination (F_BB1, 2) relating to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to the state between the flags, and in the state between the flags, until the bonus is activated (the bonus Since the role related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination (until the role is won), it functions as a bonus carryover means. In addition, the main control board 71 functions as a bonus start means for activating the bonus when the combination related to the bonus is won in the inter-flag state and shifting the gaming state to the bonus state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, in the state between the flags, when the combination related to the bonus and the predetermined combination (losing, F_special 1 to 3) are determined as the internal winning combination, as shown in FIG. Stop control is performed so that a combination of symbols (C_BB1, 2) corresponding to the combination can be displayed, and if a combination other than the predetermined combination and the combination relating to the bonus are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination according to the combination according to the bonus is determined. Stop control is performed so that the combination of symbols that have been set cannot be displayed.
Then, the main control board 71 controls the instruction monitor of the information display 14 to win a combination according to the bonus when the combination of symbols according to the combination according to the bonus can be displayed during the inter-flag state. The display (bonus instruction information) of “10” and “11” that uniquely indicates the mode of the stop operation is notified, and “10” and “11” are displayed when it is impossible to display a combination of symbols according to the role related to the bonus. Since no notification is made, the instruction monitor of the main control board 71 and the information display 14 functions as instruction information notification means.

  At this time, the main control board 71 notifies “10” and “11” via the instruction monitor only after the bonus notification. Specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the role related to the bonus as the internal winning combination in a state where the role related to the bonus has not been carried over, the main control board 71 counts the number of subsequent games, and the counting result becomes the predetermined number. If the combination related to the bonus and the predetermined combination (losing, F_special 1 to 3) are determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 notifies “10” and “11” via the instruction monitor. , Functions as a counting means for counting the number of unit games since the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination.

Further, the sub control board 72 manages the game history based on various command data received from the main control board 71, and when receiving a registration operation from a player, accepts registration of a player who performs a game. It functions as means and registration accepting means.
Here, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, a display unit 100 that performs an effect in accordance with the progress of the game, and a plurality of display units that are provided separately from the display unit 100 and include a top screen 211 and game information screens 213, 214, and 215 A first sub-display device 201 for displaying the display screen of the first sub-display device 201, and a touch sensor 201a provided on a display unit of the first sub-display device 201. 201 is controlled. Specifically, when the registration of the player is received, the sub-control board 72 controls the first sub-display device 201 so that the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 can be displayed, and registers the player. When the game information has not been received, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 cannot be displayed on the first sub-display device 201, so that the sub-control board 72 functions as a control unit.

In addition, the main control board 71 functions as a privilege granting unit for granting various privileges according to the result of the game. Specifically, the main control board 71 grants a privilege in accordance with a combination of symbols displayed along the activated line, and in a game in which the combination “F_3 Choice Bell_1st” has been determined as an internal winning combination, When the symbol combination "" is displayed, nine medals are given, and when the symbol combination "bell spilled eyes" is displayed, zero medals are given. Further, in the game in which the hand combination “F_Sure Chill Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 displays the same operation as the re-play operation when the combination of the symbols “3 consecutive Chill Lips” or “Replay” is displayed. Grant the benefits.
Further, the main control board 71 gives the privilege based on the result of the flag conversion lottery instead of the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line. For example, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the combination “F_Sure Clip” is determined as an internal winning combination, and gives a benefit such as a CT lottery when the flag conversion lottery is won.

In addition, the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an effect executing unit because the sub-control substrate 72 executes an effect according to the mode of the stop operation via the display unit 100.
Here, when the privilege to be given differs depending on the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line, the main control board 71 provides information indicating a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player via the instruction monitor. Is not notified, and when the privilege given by the combination of the symbols displayed along the activated line is the same, the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 executes an effect indicating the order of the stop operation regardless of whether the privilege to be given is the same or different depending on the combination of the displayed symbols.

In addition, the main control board 71 performs a CT lottery to determine whether or not to start the CT, so that the main control board 71 functions as an advantageous state lottery means, and when the CT lottery is won, a predetermined number of precursor games are performed after the winning. Since the CT is started after being touched, it also functions as an advantageous state starting means.
The sub control board 72 functions as a notification lottery means for performing flag conversion lottery on the sub side if the role “F_Cherile Lip” or “F_1 Certainty Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination during this CT precursor. I do.

  When the MB is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 carries over the MB as the internal winning combination until it is determined that the MB has won, so that the main control board 71 functions as a predetermined role carryover means.

In addition, the main control board 71 performs flag conversion lottery when the combination “push order bell” is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flags in which the MB is carried over as the internal winning combination. Also works.
When the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 win the flag conversion lottery, the pressing order in which the symbol combination of “cactus” is displayed for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the flag conversion lottery is not won, the pressing order in which the symbol combination of "bell" is displayed for each winning combination is notified via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Therefore, the main control board 71, the sub-control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 function as a notification unit.

  Further, the main control board 71 starts the normal ART when the ART lottery is won, ends the normal ART when the duration of the normal ART ends, and sets the CT when the MB is carried over as the internal winning combination during the normal ART. To start, it functions as first advantageous state control means and second control means. Since the duration of the normal ART is not consumed during the CT, if the MB is carried over as the internal winning combination during the normal ART, the main control board 71 interrupts the normal ART and starts the CT. .

  Further, the main control board 71 counts the difference number during the CT, and terminates the CT when the difference number reaches the end number. Here, when the combination “F_push-order bell” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery. On the other hand, "6" is added to the end number of sheets, and "6" is added to the end number to maintain the CT continuation period. Conversely, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, “6” is added to the difference number to be counted, and the duration of CT is consumed. Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a counting unit, a second advantageous state ending unit, and a conversion lottery unit.

  Further, when the combination “F_single chip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chip 4” is determined as an internal winning combination during CT, the main control board 71 sets the value of the CT meter that defines the probability of winning in the flag conversion lottery. If the flag conversion lottery is updated to a value that is easier to win in the flag conversion lottery than the currently set CT meter value, and if the flag conversion lottery is not won during CT, the flag conversion is performed more than the currently set CT meter value. It functions as a lottery stage setting unit (first lottery stage setting unit) in order to update to a value that is difficult to win in the lottery.

  Further, between MB flags (CT) in the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the value of the CT meter at the time of winning the combination “F_push order bell”, and performs the MB non-setting in the ART gaming state. Between the flags (normal ART), the first conversion lottery means and the second conversion lottery means perform the flag conversion lottery based on the ART level and the lottery state at the time of winning the combination "F_single lip 1" to "F_triple lip 4". Function as

Then, based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, the main control board 71 gives a privilege, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. The main control board 71 functions as a privilege providing means, and the main control board 71, the sub-control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 function as a notifying means.
In addition, when the flag conversion lottery during CT is won (“cactus”), the main control board 71 gives a privilege that the duration of CT is maintained without being consumed (that is, the duration is extended). When the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART is won (“Chili lip”), a privilege of adding the number of ART games is given.

  When the MB is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal ART during the MB non-flag, and thereafter, a predetermined number of forerunning games are performed without winning the MB, the normal ART additional chance zone In order to start the CT which is a function of adding a game state, it functions as an additional game state starting means.

  In addition, when the combination “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during the CT, the main control board 71 extends the duration of the normal ART and also sets the combination “ When the flag conversion lottery at the time of the "push order bell" winning is won, it functions as a first additional control means and a second additional control means in order to extend the duration of CT.

Further, when the combination of “F_single lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive lip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal ART during the MB non-flag, the flag conversion lottery is performed. It functions as first notification lottery means to determine whether or not to perform notification for displaying a combination of symbols "Chili Lip" based on the result of the conversion lottery.
On the other hand, during the CT precursor, if the combination “F_single chip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chip combination 4” is determined as an internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not the sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order. The sub-control board 72 functions as second notification lottery means.

Further, when a predetermined number of predictive games are performed during the MB flag period (when a predetermined condition is satisfied), the main control board 71 starts CT, and during a period during the CT period, when the hand “push order bell” is won. In order to perform flag conversion lottery, it functions as lottery state start means.
Then, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 display the symbol combination of “bell” at the time of winning the role “push order bell” during the precursor game between the MB flags (until a predetermined condition is satisfied). The necessary pressing order is notified via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100, and during CT (lottery state) between the MB flags, the "bell" or "bell" is determined based on the result of the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the role "push order bell". The main control board 71, the sub-control board 72, the instruction monitor and the display unit 100 notify the pressing order necessary to display the combination of the symbols of “cactus” via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Functions as a means.

  The display unit 100 includes an irradiating light device B for irradiating the irradiating light, a screen device C for displaying an image corresponding to the effect by irradiating the irradiating light from the irradiating light device B, and an irradiating light from the irradiating light device B. , A screen device for displaying an image according to the effect by the irradiation of the screen device, a front screen driving mechanism E2 and a reel screen driving mechanism F2 for switching among the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1. Therefore, the irradiating light device B functions as an irradiating light device that irradiates the irradiating light, and the screen device C functions as a movable screen that displays an image corresponding to the effect by irradiating the irradiating light from the irradiating light device. Further, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 function as a drive device that drives the movable screen so that the position at which the movable screen is arranged can be adjusted.

[Appendix 1]
The pachislot machine 1 in Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, gaming machines having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used in the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay are widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 discloses a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes referred to as a flag-to-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high replay winning probability until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination wins.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having the RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far. However, simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in game performance and further game play. There is a demand for a gaming machine having characteristics.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which is rich in gaming between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , Display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, start switch 6S, main control board 71) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. The symbol change means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for changing the symbol by performing the above operation, and the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) in accordance with the order of the push sequence (example) For example, an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations including F_push order bells 1 to 6), and a plurality of reels corresponding to the plurality of reels. Stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, and an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop. Reel stop control means (for example, a motor drive circuit) for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the operation detection means to thereby stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. 39, a main control board 71) and a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the symbol change is stopped by the reel stop control means. A prize determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won, and a predetermined combination (for example, MB) by the internal winning combination determining means. Is determined as an internal winning combination, a predetermined role carryover means (for example, a main control board 71) that carries over the predetermined combination as an internal winning combination until the winning determination unit determines that the predetermined combination has won, And the reel stop control means determines that the pressing order combination is an internal winning combination in a game in which the predetermined combination has not been carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carryover means (for example, between MB non-flags). And stopping the variation of the symbol so that the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means, and stopping the variation of the symbol so that the second symbol combination cannot be displayed. When the pressing combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carryover means, the symbols are determined according to the order of the stop operation. The change of the symbol is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the predetermined combination carryover means carries over the predetermined combination until a winning is achieved. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs the reel stop control according to the internal winning combination. Since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Therefore, even when the same combination is determined as the internal combination, a different stop control can be performed from the non-flag combination.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the pressing sequence is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between non-flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (games in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Perform control. As a result, the gaming machine according to the present invention can display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, display different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and to provide a variety of games between the flags. Specifically, by setting the second symbol combination to a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as a cherry, the rare combination can be won by the winning of the pushing sequence between the flags. The appearance frequency of the rare combination can be increased without changing the type of the combination and the winning probability.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notifying means (for example, the information display 14, the display unit 100, the main control board 71, the sub-control board 72) for notifying the order of the stop operation, and the predetermined carryover means When a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined number of precursor games is completed) is satisfied in a game in which a predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, a predetermined lottery (for example, a cactus is displayed at the time of F_ pushing order bell winning) for a predetermined period. A lottery state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting a lottery state (for example, CT) for performing flag conversion lottery of whether or not to perform the pressing, and in the lottery state, the pressing sequence is determined as an internal winning combination Conversion lottery means for performing the predetermined lottery, wherein the notifying means is provided by the predetermined role carryover means until the predetermined role is carried out until the predetermined condition is satisfied. In a game carried over as an internal winning combination (for example, a precursor game of CT), if the pressing sequence is determined as an internal winning combination, it is necessary for the symbol display means to display the first symbol combination. When the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is won in the lottery state, the stop operation required to display the second symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified. While notifying the order, when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is not won, the symbol display means is informed of the order of the stop operation required to display the first symbol combination. Features.

  According to such a gaming machine, a lottery state for performing a predetermined lottery between the flags is provided, and a stop operation for notifying the state before the lottery state between the flags starts and the lottery state between the flags is provided. Make the content different. Specifically, before the start of the lottery state, a notification for displaying the first symbol combination is always performed. During the lottery state, when the lottery is won, the second symbol that is not displayed between non-flags is displayed. The notification for displaying the combination is performed. Conversely, when the lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the first symbol combination is performed. If the second symbol combination (rare combination) is continuous, the player knows that the flag is between the flags, so that even if the flag is between the flags, the first symbol combination is intentionally notified to play the game. This makes it difficult for the user to understand the current state, which is preferable. Further, by controlling the content of the notification by a predetermined lottery, the frequency of the second symbol combination (rare combination) between the flags can be adjusted according to the predetermined lottery probability of the predetermined lottery. A period having a predetermined game property can be provided, and the game property between the flags can be diversified.

  Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is won, or when the second symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means based on the notification of the notification means, (For example, a privilege of maintaining a CT continuation period) is further provided with a privilege granting unit (for example, the main control board 71).

  When a predetermined lottery is won, a notification for displaying the second symbol combination is performed. Therefore, according to such a gaming machine, the privilege is provided by displaying the second symbol combination (rare combination). Will be done. Thus, during the period between the flags, not only the frequency of the second symbol combination (rare combination) but also the privilege to be given can be adjusted according to the lottery probability of the predetermined lottery. Can be diversified.

[Appendix 2]
The pachislot machine 1 in Appendix 2 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, gaming machines having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used in the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay are widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 discloses a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes referred to as a flag-to-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high replay winning probability until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination wins.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having the RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far. However, simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in game performance and further game play. There is a demand for a gaming machine having characteristics.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which is rich in gaming between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , Display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, start switch 6S, main control board 71) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. The symbol change means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for changing the symbol by performing the above operation, and the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. A first combination (for example, a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed in accordance with the order of the symbols. , F_pressing combinations 1 to 6), an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations, and a plurality of reels corresponding to the plurality of reels. A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) provided for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel; an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means; Reel stop control means (for example, motor drive circuit 39) for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the detection means, thereby stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. , Main control board 71), and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. A prize determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won, and a predetermined combination (for example, MB) is internally determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When the winning combination is determined, the predetermined winning combination means (for example, the main control board 71) for carrying over the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination until the winning determining means determines that the predetermined winning combination has been won. When the predetermined role is carried over as an internal winning combination by the role carryover means, a specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting a specific state (for example, CT), and the continuation of the specific state in the specific state A counting means (for example, main control board 71) for counting numerical information indicating the period (for example, the number of differences during CT); and the specific state when the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined threshold value. A specific state ending means (for example, main control board 71) for ending the state, and a predetermined lottery (for example, a cactus at the time of F_ pushing order bell winning) when the first role is determined as an internal winning combination during the specific state. (For example, the main control board 71) for performing flag conversion lottery for displaying or not, and one of a plurality of lottery stages having different probabilities of winning the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means. (For example, a main control board 71) for setting a lottery step (for example, a CT meter) of the above, and a notifying means (for example, information display 14, display unit 100, main control board, 71, a sub-control board 72), wherein the reel stop control means includes a game (for example, an MB non-flag) in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carryover means. ), When the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol display is stopped on the symbol display means so that the first symbol combination can be displayed, while the second symbol combination cannot be displayed. In addition, if the symbol change is stopped, and the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carrying means (for example, between MB flags), the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Stopping the change of the symbol so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the order of the stop operation; When a lottery is won, a predetermined value is added to the numerical information counted by itself and a predetermined value is added to the predetermined threshold. In the case of the predetermined non-winning of the conversion lottery means, A predetermined value is added to the numerical information counted by the body, and the lottery stage setting means sets the second winning combination (for example, F_single lip 1 to F_triple lip 4) by the internal winning combination determining means in the specific state. Is determined as an internal winning combination, the currently set lottery stage is updated to a lottery stage in which the predetermined lottery is easier to win than the lottery stage, and the notifying unit is configured to execute the conversion lottery unit. When the predetermined lottery is won, the symbol display means notifies the order of the stop operation required to display the second symbol combination, while the conversion lottery means does not win the predetermined lottery. In this case, the sequence of the stop operation required for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the predetermined combination carryover means carries over the predetermined combination until a winning is achieved. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs the reel stop control according to the internal winning combination. Since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Thus, even if the same combination is determined as the internal combination, a different stop control can be performed from that between the non-flags.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between non-flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (games in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Perform control. As a result, the gaming machine according to the present invention can display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, display different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and to provide a variety of games between the flags. Specifically, by setting the second symbol combination to a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as cherry, the rare combination can be won by winning the first combination between the flags. The appearance frequency of the rare combination can be increased without changing the type of the combination and the winning probability.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is treated as a specific state for a predetermined period between the flags, and when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific state, a predetermined lottery is performed. The content of the stop operation notified based on the result of the lottery is made different. Specifically, when the lottery is won, a notification for displaying the second symbol combination which is not displayed between the non-flags is performed. Conversely, when the lottery is not won, the first symbol combination is displayed. Is displayed to display. From the viewpoint of the player, by performing the stop operation according to the notification, the second symbol combination can be displayed between the flags (specific state).

  The specific state ends when the numerical information counted by the counting means reaches the threshold. When the predetermined lottery result performed at the time of winning the first combination is won, the threshold increases, and when the non-winning is performed, the numerical information increases. Since the predetermined lottery is related to the above-mentioned notification, when the second symbol combination is displayed (the predetermined lottery is won), the continuation period of the specific state is extended, and the first symbol combination is extended. When the symbol combination is displayed (the predetermined lottery is not won), the continuation period of the specific state is exhausted.

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, while changing the stop control between the flags, the duration of the specific state is controlled according to the combination of the displayed symbols (specifically, according to a predetermined lottery result). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the playability between the flags (specific state).

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the probability of winning the predetermined lottery is controlled based on the lottery stage set by the lottery stage setting means, the second symbol combination (the rare combination) in the specific state is performed. Can be adjusted in accordance with a predetermined lottery probability (lottery stage). This lottery stage is updated (promoted) to a lottery stage in which a predetermined lottery can be easily won if the second role is won in the specific state. As a result, the player has a strong interest in the winning combination in the specific state (that is, by winning a lot of the second combination, it becomes easy to win a predetermined lottery, and as a result, the specific state is changed). It is possible to diversify the playability between the flags.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and the specific state (for example, CT), information of a stop operation is notified as a state in which a game is played, so that the normal state is notified. Further, when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the specific state, the advantageous state is continued. An additional control means (for example, main control board 71) for extending the period is further provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, winning of the second role in the specific state leads not only to promotion of the lottery stage but also to extension of the duration of the advantageous state. For the player, the player is more interested in the winning combination in the specific state, so that the gambling between the flags can be diversified.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second combination is such that the number of specific symbols (for example, Chile symbols) displayed on the symbol display means when the reel change control is stopped by the reel stop control means. A plurality of different second roles (for example, F_ single chili lip 1-4, F_2 double chili lip 1-4, and triple chili lip 1-4), and the additional control means, when the change of the symbol is stopped, The second role, in which the number of specific symbols displayed on the symbol display means is larger, extends the duration of the advantageous state longer.

  According to such a gaming machine, the additional amount of the continuation period of the advantageous state varies depending on the number of specific symbols displayed when the second combination is won, so that the gambling between the flags can be diversified. .

[Appendix 3]
The pachislot machine 1 in Appendix 3 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, gaming machines having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used in the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay are widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 discloses a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes referred to as a flag-to-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high replay winning probability until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination wins.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having the RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far. However, simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in game performance and further game play. There is a demand for a gaming machine having characteristics.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which is rich in gaming between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , Display window 4), start operation detecting means (for example, start switch 6S, main control board 71) for detecting a start operation by the player, and rotating the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. The symbol change means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for changing the symbol by performing the above operation, and the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. A first combination (for example, a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed in accordance with the order of the symbols. , F_pressing combinations 1 to 6), an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations, and a plurality of reels corresponding to the plurality of reels. A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) provided for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel; an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means; Reel stop control means (for example, motor drive circuit 39) for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the detection means, thereby stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means. , Main control board 71), and when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means, based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. A prize determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won, and a predetermined combination (for example, MB) is internally determined by the internal winning combination determining means. When the winning combination is determined, the predetermined winning combination means (for example, the main control board 71) for carrying over the predetermined winning combination as an internal winning combination until the winning determining means determines that the predetermined winning combination has been won. A specific state starting means (for example, main control board 71) for starting the specific state when the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the carryover means, and a numerical value indicating a duration of the specific state in the specific state A counting means (for example, the main control board 71) for counting information (for example, the difference number during CT), and the specific state is terminated when the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined threshold value. A specific state ending means (for example, main control board 71), and when the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the specific state, a predetermined lottery (for example, whether to display a cactus at the time of F_ pushing order bell winning) A conversion lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) for performing flag conversion lottery of one or more, and one lottery step among a plurality of lottery steps having different probabilities of winning the predetermined lottery performed by the conversion lottery means ( Lottery stage setting means (for example, a main control board 71) for setting a CT meter) and notification means (for example, an information display 14, a display unit 100, a main control board 71, a sub control Board 72), and the reel stop control means performs the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carryover means (for example, between MB non-flag). When the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol display is stopped on the symbol display means so that the first symbol combination can be displayed, while the second symbol combination cannot be displayed. If the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game (for example, between MB flags) in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carryover means, the stop is performed. According to the order of the operation, the symbol display is stopped on the symbol display means so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed, and the counting means performs the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means. In the case of winning, a predetermined value is added to the numerical information counted by itself and a predetermined value is added to the predetermined threshold, and in the case of the predetermined non-winning of the conversion lottery means, Is counted A predetermined value is added to the numerical value information, and the notifying means is required to display the second symbol combination on the symbol display means when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery means is won. While notifying the order of the stop operation, the order of the stop operation required to display the first symbol combination on the symbol display unit when the predetermined lottery of the conversion lottery unit is not won is determined. Informing, when the lottery stage setting unit sets a specific lottery stage (for example, a CT meter “MAX”), the conversion lottery unit always wins the predetermined lottery during a predetermined number of unit games, When the lottery stage setting means sets a predetermined lottery stage, the predetermined lottery is won with a predetermined probability.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the predetermined combination carryover means carries over the predetermined combination until a winning is achieved. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs the reel stop control according to the internal winning combination. Since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Therefore, even when the same combination is determined as the internal combination, a different stop control can be performed from the non-flag combination.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between non-flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (games in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Perform control. As a result, the gaming machine according to the present invention can display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, display different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and to provide a variety of games between the flags. Specifically, by setting the second symbol combination to a symbol combination corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as cherry, the rare combination can be won by winning the first combination between the flags. The appearance frequency of the rare combination can be increased without changing the type of the combination and the winning probability.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state is treated as a specific state for a predetermined period between the flags, and when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific state, a predetermined lottery is performed. The content of the stop operation notified based on the result of the lottery is made different. Specifically, when a lottery is won, a notification for displaying a second symbol combination that is not displayed between the non-flags is performed. Conversely, when a lottery is not won, the first symbol combination is displayed. Is displayed to display. From the player's point of view, by performing the stop operation according to the notification, the second symbol combination can be displayed between the flags (specific state).

  The specific state ends when the numerical information counted by the counting means reaches the threshold. When the predetermined lottery result performed at the time of winning the first combination is won, the threshold increases, and when the non-winning is performed, the numerical information increases. Since the predetermined lottery is related to the above-mentioned notification, when the second symbol combination is displayed (the predetermined lottery is won), the continuation period of the specific state is extended, and the first symbol combination is extended. When the symbol combination is displayed (the predetermined lottery is not won), the continuation period of the specific state is exhausted.

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, while changing the stop control between the flags, the duration of the specific state is controlled according to the combination of the displayed symbols (specifically, according to a predetermined lottery result). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the playability between the flags (specific state).

  At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the probability of winning the predetermined lottery is controlled based on the lottery stage set by the lottery stage setting means, the second symbol combination between the flags (rare combination) Can be adjusted in accordance with a predetermined lottery probability (lottery stage). In particular, when a specific lottery stage is set as a lottery stage, a predetermined lottery is always won during a predetermined number of unit games, so that it is possible to have expectations for subsequent games, The interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the specific state, the lottery stage setting means sets the lottery at a probability according to the currently set lottery stage. It is characterized in that the stage is updated to a lottery stage in which it is easier to win the predetermined lottery than the lottery stage.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the promotion of the lottery stage based on the second combination is performed with a probability corresponding to the currently set lottery stage, a new gaming property is provided for the promotion of the lottery stage. And the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second combination is such that the number of specific symbols (for example, Chile symbols) displayed on the symbol display means when the reel change control is stopped by the reel stop control means. A plurality of different second roles (for example, F_ single chili lip 1-4, F_2 double chili lip 1-4, and triple chili lip 1-4), and the lottery stage setting means, when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped Updating the lottery stage currently set with a higher probability to the second combination having a greater number of specific symbols displayed on the symbol display means to a lottery stage in which the predetermined lottery is easier to win than the lottery stage. Features.

  According to such a gaming machine, the probability of elevating the lottery stage varies depending on the number of specific symbols displayed at the time of winning the second combination, so that the gambling between the flags can be diversified.

[Appendix 4]
The pachislot machine 1 in Appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as disclosed in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), in recent years, information for establishing an internal winning combination such as information for establishing an internal BACKGROUND ART A gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information is known. In addition, such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and an AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines or ART machines.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation was performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side. However, in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation has an effect on a player's profit (so-called ball-out). It is required that navigation is performed on a main (main control) side that manages a profit of a player. Here, when navigating on the main side, the navigator has a strong meaning of assuring that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current game situation.

  However, in such a navigation, there is a problem that the mode of the navigation becomes monotonous, and the variety of games is spoiled.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing various navigations while appropriately performing navigation that affects profits on the main side.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state and an advantageous state (for example, CT) which is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played, and a plurality of symbols are displayed. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R), a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels, and a main unit for controlling the progress of the game. A control unit (for example, a main control board 71) and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling an effect related to a game, wherein the main control unit detects a start operation by a player Based on detection means (for example, the start switch 6S, the main control board 71) and the start operation detected by the start operation detection means, the symbol is changed by rotating the reel to change the symbol (for example, Based on the detection of the start operation by the motor operation circuit 39, the main control board 71) and the start operation detecting means, a first symbol combination (for example, a replay ) Or a combination of a plurality of symbols including a second symbol combination (for example, a reach eye lip) is a predetermined one of a plurality of combinations including a push sequence (for example, F_reach eye lip A to D) that can be stopped and displayed. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a probability, and a stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. (For example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, and the timing when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. The reel stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) for stopping the rotation of the reel to stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, When the fluctuation is stopped, based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the winning determination means for determining whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won (for example, A main control board 71), an advantageous state lottery means (for example, main control board 71) for performing a first lottery (for example, a CT lottery) as to whether or not to start the advantageous state; When the first lottery is won, the advantageous state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the advantageous state after a predetermined number of unit games have been played since the winning, and the pushing sequence is performed in an internal manner. When the winning combination is determined, a special lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) for performing a second lottery (for example, a flag conversion lottery) and a special privilege when the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery means is won. (For example, a CT winning), and a reel giving control means (for example, a main control board 71). The reel stop controlling means, when the pressing sequence is determined as an internal winning combination, a stop operation of the stop operation. The symbol change is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the order, and the sub-control unit executes an effect according to the mode of the stop operation. The effect execution means (for example, the display unit 100, the sub-control board 72) and the unit game of the predetermined number of times from the time of winning the first lottery performed by the advantageous state lottery means to the start of the advantageous state, Successor A notification lottery unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for performing a third lottery (for example, a navigation lottery during the CT precursor) when the internal winning combination is determined, and the effect execution unit of the sub-control unit When the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery unit of the main control unit or the third lottery performed by the notification lottery unit of the sub-control unit is won, the second symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display unit. An effect according to the order of the stop operation for displaying is performed.

  In such a gaming machine, when the second lottery performed on the main (main control unit) side is won, a special privilege is provided, and the effect is executed by the effect execution means on the sub (sub-control unit) side. Notification for displaying the combination is performed. Since the second symbol combination is displayed by performing a stop operation in accordance with this notification, the second symbol combination means a symbol combination (for example, a reach eye) to which a special privilege is given to the player. Will be. For this reason, if no benefit is given even though the second symbol combination is displayed, the player feels strong dissatisfaction and loses interest. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main side determines whether or not a privilege is to be provided, and the second symbol combination is notified according to this determination. It can be managed properly on the main side.

  By the way, in the case of a pachislot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, instead of immediately performing the advantageous control, performing the advantageous control after performing a predetermined number of games, for example, ART In such a case, the ART may be actually started after several bogus games have been won. During such a precursor game, since it is already determined that a bonus (profit) is to be given to the player, even if the second symbol combination is displayed and the bonus accompanying this display is not given, , Players do not feel dissatisfied. That is, since advantageous control will be performed when several omen games are completed, the player will feel that the second symbol combination displayed during the omen game has provided a benefit, and this will be interesting. There is no loss. On the other hand, increasing the chances of displaying the second symbol combination (for example, the reach eye) displayed when a special privilege is given increases the variation of the way of displaying the symbol combination, thereby improving the playability. I do.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the notification lottery means on the sub (sub-controller) side performs the foreboding game (a predetermined number of unit games from when the first lottery is won to when the advantageous state starts). The three lotteries are performed, and the effect executing means notifies the second symbol combination based on the lottery results. Although this notification is not related to the award of the privilege as described above, by performing a stop operation in accordance with the notification, it is possible to display the second symbol combination displayed when the special award is provided. The performance is improved. As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the notification that affects the profit (privilege) is managed on the main side, while the notification that does not affect the profit is displayed on the sub side as a variety of presentation in the production. Certain alerts can be made.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second lottery is won, the privilege granting means grants a privilege of winning the first lottery performed by the advantageous state lottery means.

  When the first lottery is won, the advantageous state starts, and according to such a gaming machine, when the second lottery is won (the second symbol combination is displayed), the advantageous state starts. Also in this case, during the precursor game until the advantageous state starts, the second symbol combination is notified along with the third lottery. From the player's point of view, the display of the second symbol combination is displayed because it is a precursor game (that is, displayed as a result of the third lottery), or the display is shifted to the precursor game with this display. Since the player does not know whether the game has been played (that is, whether the result has been displayed as a result of the second lottery), the player has a strong interest in the flow of the game so far, and the interest is improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the third lottery performed by the notification lottery means of the sub-control unit is won, the privilege providing means does not provide the special privilege, and The special privilege is given when the second lottery performed by the conversion lottery means is won.

  According to such a gaming machine, a special privilege is provided only when the second lottery performed on the main side is won out of the second lottery and the third lottery which are conditions for notifying the second symbol combination, If the third lottery performed on the sub side is won, no special privilege is given. Thereby, while the notification affecting the profit (privilege) is managed on the main side, the notification not affecting the profit can be performed on the sub side with a variety of ways of showing in the effect.

[Appendix 5]
The pachislot machine 1 in Appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, gaming machines having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used in the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay are widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 discloses a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes referred to as a flag-to-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high replay winning probability until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination wins.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having the RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far. However, simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in game performance and further game play. There is a demand for a gaming machine having characteristics.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which is rich in gaming between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having an advantageous state (for example, ART) which is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state by notifying the information of the normal state and the stop operation as the state in which the game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, start switch 6S, main control board 71) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and a start operation detected by the start operation detecting means are determined as an internal winning combination. In this case, a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of the stop operation (for example, F_). The third symbol combination (e.g., replay) or the fourth symbol combination (e.g., Chilelip) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of the pressing order bells 1 to 6) and the stop operation. An internal winning combination determining means (for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including two combinations (for example, F_ single chili lip 1-4, F_2 double chili lip 1-4, F_ triple chili lip 1-4)). For example, a main control board 71), stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, Inside The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining unit and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit, and the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit is displayed. A reel stop control unit (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation, and a symbol displayed on the symbol display unit when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control unit. A prize determining unit (for example, the main control board 71) that determines whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit has won based on the combination, and a predetermined combination (for example, , MB) is determined as an internal winning combination, the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination until the winning determination unit determines that the predetermined winning combination has been won. A predetermined carryover means (for example, a main control board 71) for carrying over, a reporting means (for example, an information display 14, a display unit 100, a main control board 71, a sub control board 72) for reporting information of a stop operation; In the state, when the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carryover means, if the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a first lottery (for example, F_push order bell winning) is performed. A first conversion lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) for performing a flag conversion lottery of whether or not to display a cactus at the time, and the predetermined role as an internal winning combination by the advantageous state and the predetermined role carryover means. If the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination when the carryover has not been carried over, the second lottery (for example, when the F_single lip, F_2 double lip, and F_3 triple lip is won, the lip And a second conversion lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) for performing a flag conversion lottery of whether or not to display the predetermined role. When the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game not carried over (for example, between MB non-flags), the symbol change is stopped so that the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means. On the other hand, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped so that the second symbol combination cannot be displayed, and the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carryover means (for example, between MB flags). When one winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the change of the symbols is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the order of the stop operation. Further, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means, the symbol display means is provided to the symbol display means in accordance with a stop operation sequence. While the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped so that the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination can be displayed, in the game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carryover means, the second combination is played. When the symbol combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display is stopped on the symbol display means so that the fourth symbol combination can be displayed, and the symbol variation is stopped on the symbol display means so as not to be displayed. The notifying unit notifies the order of a stop operation required to display the second symbol combination on the symbol display unit when the first conversion random determination unit wins the first lottery. On the other hand, when the first conversion random determination means does not win the first lottery, the symbol display means notifies the symbol display means of the order of the stop operation required to display the first symbol combination, When the second conversion lottery means is won in the second lottery, the symbol display means is notified of the order of the stop operation required to display the fourth symbol combination, while the second conversion lottery is notified. In a case where the second lottery of the means is not won, the order of a stop operation required for displaying the third symbol combination on the symbol display means is notified.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the predetermined combination carryover means carries over the predetermined combination until a winning is achieved. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs the reel stop control according to the internal winning combination. Since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Therefore, even when the same combination is determined as the internal combination, a different stop control can be performed from the non-flag combination.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between non-flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (games in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Perform control. When the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed between non-flags in accordance with the order of the stop operation. Then, stop control is performed so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed. As a result, the gaming machine according to the present invention can display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, display different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and to provide a variety of games between the flags. Specifically, by setting the second symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination to a combination of symbols corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as a cherry, the rare combination is won by winning the first combination between the flags. As a result, the rare combination always wins when the second combination is won, and the appearance frequency of the rare combination can be increased without changing the type and the winning probability of the winning combination.

  Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first lottery is performed when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag, and the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the non-flag. The second lottery is performed, and the content of the stop operation notified based on the results of the lottery is changed. Specifically, when the first lottery is won, a notification for displaying the second symbol combination that is not displayed between the non-flags is performed. Conversely, when the first lottery is not won, the second symbol combination is notified. Notification for displaying one symbol combination is performed. In addition, when the second lottery is won, a notification for displaying the fourth symbol combination is performed. Conversely, when the second lottery is not won, the third symbol combination is displayed. Make a notification.

  As described above, the combination of symbols to be notified based on the first lottery is determined between the flags, and the combination of symbols to be notified based on the second lottery is determined between the non-flags. In both cases, the combination of symbols to be displayed can be controlled, and the playability between flags and between non-flags can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a privilege (for example, a first lottery) is provided when the first conversion lottery means has won the first lottery or the second conversion lottery means has won the second lottery. A bonus providing means (for example, the main control board 71) for providing a privilege for maintaining the number of CT end differences when winning is performed, and a bonus for adding the number of ART games when the second lottery is won. It is further characterized by being provided.

  When the first lottery is won, the second symbol combination is displayed by following the notification, and when the second lottery is won, the fourth symbol combination is displayed by following the notification. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to control the appearance frequency of the symbol combination (rare combination) to which the privilege is given between the flags and the non-flags, and to enhance the playability between the flags and the non-flags. be able to.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first conversion lottery means performs the first lottery so as to win with a probability according to a set first lottery step (for example, a CT meter). When the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carryover means, the currently set first lottery stage is changed from the first lottery stage to the second lottery stage. The apparatus further comprises a first lottery stage setting means (for example, a main control board 71) for updating to a first lottery stage having a high probability of winning the first lottery.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, when the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the flag, the first lottery stage is updated to the first lottery stage having a higher probability of winning the first lottery (promotion). ) Is done. As a result, the player has a strong interest in the winning combination between the flags, and the gambling between the flags can be diversified. Further, when the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination between the flags, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the third symbol combination is displayed. It is possible to grasp that the first lottery stage has been promoted, which is preferable.

[Appendix 6]
The pachislot machine 1 in Appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, gaming machines having a replay time (RT) that enables a game while reducing the amount of medals used in the game by increasing the winning probability of the replay are widely known. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-223289 discloses a gaming machine that activates a replay time when a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination. Such a replay time is sometimes referred to as a flag-to-flag RT, and a game can be played with a high replay winning probability until a bonus determined (carried over) as an internal winning combination wins.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, some pachislot machines having the RT between flags as in Patent Document 1 have been known so far. However, simply increasing the winning probability of replay until a bonus is won is poor in game performance and further game play. There is a demand for a gaming machine having characteristics.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which is rich in gaming between flags.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having an advantageous state (for example, ART) which is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state by notifying the information of the normal state and the stop operation as the state in which the game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, start switch 6S, main control board 71) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and a start operation detected by the start operation detecting means are determined as an internal winning combination. In this case, a combination of a plurality of symbols including a first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or a second symbol combination (for example, a cactus) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of the stop operation (for example, F_). The third symbol combination (e.g., replay) or the fourth symbol combination (e.g., Chilelip) can be stopped and displayed according to the order of the pressing order bells 1 to 6) and the stop operation. An internal winning combination determining means (for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations including two combinations (for example, F_ single chili lip 1-4, F_2 double chili lip 1-4, F_ triple chili lip 1-4)). For example, a main control board 71), stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, the main control board 71) provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel, Inside The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the internal winning combination determined by the winning combination determining unit and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit, and the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit is displayed. A reel stop control unit (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation, and a symbol displayed on the symbol display unit when the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control unit. A prize determining unit (for example, the main control board 71) that determines whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit has won based on the combination, and a predetermined combination (for example, , MB) is determined as an internal winning combination, the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination until the winning determination unit determines that the predetermined winning combination has been won. The internal winning combination determination in a state in which the predetermined role carryover means (for example, the main control board 71) carries over the predetermined role and the predetermined role carryover means in the advantageous state does not carry over the predetermined role (for example, between non-flags of the normal ART). After the means has determined the predetermined combination as an internal winning combination, if a predetermined number of unit games are performed without winning the predetermined combination (for example, when the precursor is consumed), the duration of the advantageous state is extended. An additional game starting means (for example, main control board 71) for starting an additional gaming state (for example, CT) and the internal winning combination determining means determines the second role as an internal winning combination during the additional gaming state. First addition control means (for example, main control board 71) for extending the duration of the advantageous state, and the first winning combination is internally won by the internal winning combination determination means during the addition gaming state. Is determined, the conversion lottery means (for example, the main control board 71) for performing a predetermined lottery (for example, a flag conversion lottery for displaying whether or not to display a cactus at the time of F_ pushing order bell), and the conversion lottery means When the predetermined lottery to be performed is won, a second additional control means (for example, the main control board 71) for extending the duration of the additional gaming state, and a notification means (for example, the information display 14) for notifying the information of the stop operation , A display unit 100, a main control board 71, and a sub-control board 72), and the reel stop control means controls a game (for example, MB) in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carryover means. If the first winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination (between non-flags), the symbol change is stopped so that the first symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means. In the game (for example, between MB flags) in which the change of the symbol is stopped so that the second symbol combination cannot be displayed, and the predetermined role is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined role carry-over means. Is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol change is stopped so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination can be displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the order of the stop operation, and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped. If the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination by the role carryover means, the third symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the order of stop operation. Alternatively, while changing the symbol so that the fourth symbol combination can be displayed, the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination by the predetermined combination carry-over means, and the second combination is executed. When the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the symbol display is stopped on the symbol displaying means so that the fourth symbol combination can be displayed, and the symbol variation is stopped on the symbol displaying means so that the third symbol combination cannot be displayed. When the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in a state where the predetermined role carrying means in the advantageous state does not carry over the predetermined combination, the symbol is notified by the notification means. A first notification lottery for determining whether or not to notify the order of the stop operation for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the display means (for example, a chili lip is displayed at the time of winning a F_ single chili lip, F_2 double chili lip, F_ triple chili lip) A first notification lottery means (for example, a main control board 71) for performing flag conversion lottery of whether or not the predetermined role is carried over in the advantageous state. Between the predetermined number of unit games from when the internal winning combination determining means determines the predetermined winning combination as the internal winning combination to when the additional gaming starting means starts the additional gaming state (for example, a precursor of CT). During the game), when the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, a second notification lottery for determining whether or not to notify the order of the stop operation by the notification means is performed. And a second notification lottery means (for example, a sub-control board 72), wherein the notification means is a first notification lottery of the first notification lottery means and a second notification lottery of the second notification lottery means. It is characterized in that information of the stop operation is reported based on the result.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the predetermined combination carryover means carries over the predetermined combination until a winning is achieved. Here, the pachi-slot machine performs the reel stop control according to the internal winning combination. Since the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination between the flags, the other combination and the predetermined combination overlap. Thus, even if the same combination is determined as the internal combination, a different stop control can be performed from that between the non-flags.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed between non-flags (a game in which the predetermined combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination). Stop control is performed so that the first symbol combination or the second symbol combination is displayed between the flags (games in which the predetermined combination is carried over as an internal winning combination) according to the order of the stop operation. Perform control. When the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed between non-flags in accordance with the order of the stop operation. Then, stop control is performed so that the fourth symbol combination is displayed. As a result, the gaming machine according to the present invention can display different stop controls between flags and non-flags, that is, display different combinations of symbols between flags and non-flags while using the same winning combination. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of symbol combinations displayed between the flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and to provide a variety of games between the flags. Specifically, by setting the second symbol combination and the fourth symbol combination to a combination of symbols corresponding to a so-called rare combination such as a cherry, the rare combination is won by winning the first combination between the flags. As a result, the rare combination always wins when the second combination is won, and the appearance frequency of the rare combination can be increased without changing the type and the winning probability of the winning combination.

  By the way, in a pachislot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, instead of immediately performing the advantageous control, performing the advantageous control after performing a predetermined number of games (a precursor game) There is. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the additional gaming state is started when the state is in the advantageous state and the predetermined combination is carried over as the internal winning combination, that is, when between the flags during the advantageous state, the additional gaming state is started. A predetermined number of precursor games are performed before the start of the game.

  As described above, since the stop control is different between the flags and the non-flag, the stop control (combination of displayed symbols) is performed when a precursor game is performed between the flags as in the gaming machine of the present invention. Therefore, a player may know that a precursor game is being played. For example, during the period between the flags, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed by the winning of the second combination, and the third symbol combination is not displayed. On the other hand, during the period between the non-flags, according to the pressing order at the time of winning the second combination. Since the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination is displayed, if the fourth symbol combination is frequently displayed irrespective of the pressing order, the player is likely to be in the middle of the flag (being a precursor game). Will be understood.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, if the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the flag (during the precursor game), the pressing order (the order of the stop operation) is notified. At the time of winning the second combination between the flags, the fourth symbol combination is displayed regardless of the pressing order. Therefore, it is not necessary to notify the pressing order, but if the pressing order is notified, The player recognizes that the fourth symbol combination has been displayed according to the notified push order (because the fourth symbol combination is displayed according to the push order between non-flags, the fourth symbol combination is displayed in the notified game). When the symbol combination is displayed, the player easily recognizes the non-flag interval), which makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the flag is between the flags (during the precursor game). This can prevent the game between the flags (during the precursor game) from becoming monotonous, and improve the playability between the flags.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling effects relating to the game, The second notification lottery means is provided in the sub-control unit.

  In recent years, it has been demanded that the main (main control unit) side manage the profit of the player appropriately, and the notification of the stop operation affects the profit. Side needs to control. In this regard, the notification of the pressing order when the second combination is won during the flag does not affect the profit (that is, the fourth symbol combination is always displayed during the flag). In such a gaming machine, the notification is controlled on the sub (sub-control unit) side. Since the main control unit has a larger capacity limit than the sub control unit, by controlling the notification on the sub side when the profit is not affected, the capacity and processing load of the main control unit can be reduced. It is suitable.

[Appendix 7]
The pachislot machine 1 in Appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is set to a high probability may be referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to navigate, so that the player can control the AT or the ART. You want to have a longer period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART from various viewpoints. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732) specifies a watermelon or cherry as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when a winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays a game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Literature, the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, so that the gaming characteristics tend to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the number of AT games is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in adding an advantageous state and allows a player to continue playing without being bored.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, start switch 6S, main control board 71) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and a start operation detection unit that detects a start operation from among a plurality of roles. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a probability, and a stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. (For example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. The reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the symbol display means, and the fluctuation of the symbol is controlled by the reel stop control means. When stopped, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means wins. A prize determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not an additional gaming state (for example, CT) for extending a duration of the advantageous state is extended when a predetermined condition is satisfied; Means (for example, the main control board 71), and in the additional gaming state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (for example, the number of ART games is added) in accordance with the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. (A main control board 71) and counting means (e.g., a CT game number counter, a main game counter, etc.) for counting the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended by the additional control means in the additional game state. A control board 71) and an additional game ending means for ending the additional game state when the counting result of the counting means reaches a predetermined number (for example, eight times). (For example, the main control board 71).

  In such a gaming machine, when a transition is made to the additional gaming state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (addition is performed) until the counting means has counted a predetermined number of times. Here, the counting means counts the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended (no addition is performed) during the additional game state, that is, when the addition is performed during the additional game state, Since the number of times is not counted, the additional gaming state will continue for a longer time as the additional is performed. From the viewpoint of the player, it is not known how long the added gaming state will continue, and the added gaming state will not end as long as the added gaming is performed during the added gaming state. It is possible to have a strong interest and continue the game without getting bored, and to enhance the interest of the game in the additional game state.

  Also, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first winning combination (for example, F_Surelilip, F_1 Surelilip) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means, a conversion lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery. (For example, a main control board 71), and the additional control means, when the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, when the predetermined lottery is won, sets the continuation period. When the second winning combination (for example, cactus, weak cherry, or strong cherry) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determination means, the continuation period is extended by the second additional amount. The counting means returns the counting result to an initial value when the duration is extended in response to the first winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination.

  In such a gaming machine, when the first combination or the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the additional gaming state, the addition is performed, and the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Is added according to the above, the counting result of the counting means returns to the initial value. Thereby, for example, even if the added gaming state is immediately before the end (the count result is close to the predetermined number), the added gaming state is restarted from the beginning by performing the additional according to the first role. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the additional game state.

  In addition, the addition based on the first combination (addition of returning the counting result to the initial value) is performed only when the first combination is won in a predetermined lottery when the first combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Can be prevented from giving excessive profits, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

[Appendix 8]
The pachislot machine 1 in Appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that informs a player of information that is advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, so as not to miss the role determined as an internal winning combination. I have. It should be noted that informing such information that the player is advantageous is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigating is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). In addition, a gaming machine that performs AT in a high-probability replay state (RT: replay time) in which the probability that replay (re-game) is determined as an internal winning combination is set to a high probability may be referred to as an ART machine or the like.

  According to a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function or an ART function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to navigate, so that the player can control the AT or the ART. You want to have a longer period of time.

  Therefore, in recent years, various measures have been taken to increase the period of AT and ART from various viewpoints. For example, Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732) specifies a watermelon or cherry as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games when a winning combination is determined is disclosed. According to this gaming machine, the number of AT games increases in accordance with the internal winning combination, so that the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays a game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Literature, the number of AT games is simply increased based on the internal winning combination, so that the gaming characteristics tend to be monotonous, and a new mechanism for increasing the number of AT games is required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances interest in adding an advantageous state and allows a player to continue playing without being bored.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and an advantageous state (for example, an ART gaming state) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. Starting operation detecting means (for example, start switch 6S, main control board 71) for detecting a starting operation by the player; and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. (For example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) and a start operation detection unit that detects a start operation from among a plurality of roles. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a probability, and a stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel. (For example, the stop switch 7S, the main control board 71), the rotation of the reel based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, and the timing at which the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting unit. The reel stop control means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by stopping the symbol display means, and the fluctuation of the symbol is controlled by the reel stop control means. When stopped, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means wins. A prize determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining whether or not an additional gaming state (for example, CT) for extending a duration of the advantageous state is extended when a predetermined condition is satisfied; Means (for example, the main control board 71) and, in the additional gaming state, in response to the internal winning combination determining means determining a predetermined winning combination (for example, triple lip) as an internal winning combination, Additional control means (for example, main control board 71) for extending the duration, and counting means (for example, the number of CT games) for counting the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended by the additional control means in the additional game state When a predetermined number (for example, eight) of unit games is counted by the counter and the main control board 71) and the counting means, the additional game state is ended. Add-on game ending means (for example, main control board 71), the add-on control means, when the number of extensions of the continuation period in the add-on game state is less than or equal to a specific number, Is extended as a first additional amount (for example, 10 games) in accordance with that the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the number of extensions exceeds the specific number, the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination. The continuation period is extended by a second additional amount (for example, 20 games) which is larger than the first additional amount in response to the completion.

  In such a gaming machine, when a transition is made to the additional gaming state, the duration of the advantageous state is extended (addition is performed) until the counting means has counted a predetermined number of times. Here, the counting means counts the number of unit games in which the duration is not extended (no addition is performed) during the additional game state, that is, when the addition is performed during the additional game state, Since the number of times is not counted, the additional gaming state will continue for a longer time as the additional is performed. From the viewpoint of the player, it is not known how long the added gaming state will continue, and the added gaming state will not end as long as the added gaming is performed during the added gaming state. It is possible to have a strong interest and continue the game without getting bored, and to enhance the interest of the game in the additional game state.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the number of times of addition (triggered number of extension of the continuation period) triggered by the predetermined combination exceeds a specific number, the amount added per time is calculated from the first additional amount. Increase to the second added amount. As described above, since the addition is performed, the counting by the counting means is not performed, and the additional gaming state is continued. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the player, the additional amount per game increases as the additional gaming state continues. Can be expected, and the interest in the game during the additional game state can be increased.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the counting means returns the counting result to an initial value when the continuation period is extended in response to the predetermined combination being determined as an internal winning combination. And

  According to such a gaming machine, in the event that an additional event is triggered by a predetermined combination, the counting result of the counting means returns to the initial value. Thus, for example, even if the additional gaming state is immediately before the end (the count result is close to the predetermined number), the additional gaming state is restarted from the beginning by performing the additional with the predetermined combination as an opportunity. Therefore, it is possible to expect an increase in the additional amount per time. Here, if the additional gaming state is not restarted, the winning probability of the predetermined combination must be equal to or more than a certain probability in order to have the gaming property of increasing the additional amount per game, and the game balance is lost. Although there is a possibility that the bonus game state may be added, even if the winning probability of the predetermined combination is suppressed by restarting the additional gaming state, it is possible to provide the gaming ability of increasing the additional amount per time, and to balance the game. It is possible to give a high game performance while planning.

[Appendix 9]
The pachislot machine 1 in Appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as disclosed in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), in recent years, information for establishing an internal winning combination such as information for establishing an internal BACKGROUND ART A gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information is known. In addition, such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and an AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines or ART machines.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation was performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side. However, in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation has an effect on a player's profit (so-called ball-out). It is required that navigation is performed on a main (main control) side that manages a profit of a player. As an example of such a navigation, a navigation for winning a bonus combination when a bonus combination is won can be considered.

  By the way, when navigating under the control of the sub side as in the past, navigating has a meaning as a production, and navigating like a production that suggests the game situation to realize various gameplay Since it is possible, for example, even at a timing when the bonus combination cannot be won, it is possible to perform a navigation in which a bonus symbol is aimed. On the other hand, when performing navigation on the main side that manages profits, it is strongly implied that the navigation system guarantees that profits are strictly managed, and it is necessary to express the current game situation strictly. For example, it is not possible to perform a navigation for winning a bonus combination at a timing when the bonus combination cannot be won.

  Here, in the case of the pachislot machine, when the bonus combination and another combination have been won, the bonus combination may be preferentially drawn in over the bonus combination, so the bonus combination is won. However, the bonus role does not always win, and it is required to navigate at an appropriate timing.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to perform a navigation for winning a bonus combination at an appropriate timing on a main side.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine having a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and a bonus state (for example, a bonus state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, as a state in which a game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. A main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling effects relating to the game, wherein the main control unit A start operation detecting means (for example, a start switch 6S, a main control board 71) for detecting a start operation by the user, and rotating the reel based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. An internal winning combination is determined with a predetermined probability from a plurality of combinations based on a symbol variation unit (for example, a motor drive circuit 39, a main control board 71) for varying a design and a start operation detected by the start operation detection unit. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71), and stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, provided to correspond to the plurality of reels, for detecting a stop operation for stopping each reel). The symbol is stopped by stopping the rotation of the reel based on a main control board 71), an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and a timing at which a stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means. A reel stop control unit (for example, a main control board 71) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the display unit; When the fluctuation of is stopped, based on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means determines whether or not a winning combination has been won (for example, When the internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining unit, the internal winning combination is determined until the winning determination unit determines that the bonus combination has won. Bonus carryover means (for example, main control board 71) to carry over as a role, and bonus start means (for example, main control board 71) for starting the bonus state when the winning combination is determined by the winning determination means to be awarded. And instruction information notifying means (for example, the information display 14 and the main control board 71) for notifying instruction information uniquely indicating a mode of the stop operation. In a game in which the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the information notifying unit determines that the first combination (for example, F_special combination 1 to 3) is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination. In addition, while notifying the bonus instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination, the second combination (for example, F_maintenance lip A) is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the bonus combination. In this case, the bonus stop information is not notified, and the reel stop control unit determines that the combination of symbols according to the bonus combination is the same when the bonus combination and the first combination are determined as the internal winning combination. While the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped so that it can be displayed on the symbol display means, when the bonus combination and the second combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol according to the bonus combination is determined. And wherein the stopping the change of the display impossible symbol combinations on the symbol display unit.

  In such a gaming machine, the instruction information notifying means of the main control unit notifies the player of bonus instruction information that uniquely indicates a mode of a stop operation for winning a bonus combination. Navigating for winning the bonus combination can be performed. Here, the bonus instruction information is notified when the first combination capable of displaying the combination of the symbols according to the bonus combination on the symbol display means is won together with the bonus combination, and the combination of the symbols according to the bonus combination is displayed. If the second combination that cannot be displayed on the means is won together with the bonus combination, it is not notified. Therefore, according to the navigation by the main control unit of the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to perform the navigation for winning the bonus combination at an appropriate timing.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control unit may determine that the internal winning combination determination unit determines the bonus combination as an internal winning combination while the bonus carryover unit does not carry over the bonus combination. A counting means for counting the number of unit games (for example, the main control board 71), and the internal winning combination determining means determining the bonus combination as an internal winning combination when the bonus carryover means does not carry over the bonus combination. And a sign game frequency determining means (for example, the main control board 71) for determining a sign game frequency indicating the number of unit games until a bonus notification for notifying that the bonus role is being carried over. The instruction information notifying unit does not notify the bonus instruction information until the counting unit counts the unit games for the number of precursor games. The first roles in addition to the bonus combination after the counting means has counted the unit game of the aura number of games content when it is determined as the internal winning combination, characterized by informing the bonus instruction information.

  When the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus combination may be notified after a predetermined number of games have been played after the bonus combination is won. For example, it is a common practice to perform an effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over a plurality of games, and to notify the presence or absence of the winning of the bonus combination according to the result of the continuous effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. I have. In this case, if the main side reports the bonus instruction information during the continuous production, the meaning of the continuous production may be lost, and the interest may be spoiled. Here, since the main control unit has a limited capacity, it is preferable to control the production on the sub (sub-control unit) side to perform various productions with high production effects, while managing the profit. The main control unit cannot receive a signal from the outside, and is required to devise a device capable of properly grasping the timing at which the continuous effect controlled by the sub side ends.

  In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the main side determines the number of precursory games up to the announcement of the bonus, and determines the bonus combination as the internal winning combination to determine the unit gaming. Count the number of times. Then, when the counted result reaches the number of predictive games, bonus instruction information is notified. Since a signal can be notified from the main side to the sub side, by controlling the production in accordance with the number of games to be notified of the bonus instruction information on the sub side, for example, the bonus on the main side during the continuous production There is no notification of instruction information. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to perform navigation for winning the bonus combination at an appropriate timing on the main side while securing the variety of effects.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a normal state (for example, a general gaming state) and a bonus state (for example, a bonus state) which is more advantageous for the player than the normal state as a state in which the game is played. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, display window 4) for displaying a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels. ), A main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling effects relating to the game. By starting operation detecting means (for example, start switch 6S, main control board 71) for detecting a starting operation by the player, and rotating the reel based on detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means. The symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for changing the symbol, and the order of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Accordingly, a plurality of symbol combinations including the first symbol combination (for example, a bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, a bell spilled eye) includes a push sequence (for example, F_3 option bell_1st) that can be stopped and displayed. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations, and a stop provided for the plurality of reels for stopping each reel. A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) for detecting an operation, and an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation detecting means. Reel stop control means (for example, a main control board 71) for stopping the rotation of the reel to stop the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the timing at which the stop operation is detected; Whether or not the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means has won based on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means when the change of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means. (For example, the main control board 71) and the internal winning combination determining means, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning determining means determines that the bonus combination has won. Up to this point, a bonus carryover means (for example, the main control board 71) for carrying over the bonus combination as an internal winning combination, and the bonus combination When it is determined that a winning has been achieved, a bonus start means (for example, the main control board 71) for starting the bonus state and an instruction information notifying means (for example, information display) for notifying the instruction information uniquely indicating the mode of the stop operation Device 14 and a main control board 71), and in the game in which the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the instruction information notifying means includes a predetermined combination (for example, F_special combination) in addition to the bonus combination. When 1-3) is determined as the internal winning combination, while notifying the bonus instruction information indicating the mode of the stop operation for winning the bonus combination, the push-sequence combination is performed in addition to the bonus combination. A push indicating a mode of a stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means without notifying the bonus instruction information when the internal symbol combination is determined. In a game in which the first combination information is notified and the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, the first symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means when the pressing sequence is determined as the internal winning combination. Is displayed, and the reel stop control means notifies the reel stop control means that the bonus combination and the predetermined combination are internal. When the winning combination has been determined, the variation of the symbols is stopped so that the symbol combination according to the bonus combination can be displayed on the symbol display means, while the bonus combination and the pushing sequence combination are set as the internal winning combinations. In the case where the symbol combination is determined, the change of the symbol is stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be displayed on the symbol display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the pressing combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the instruction information notified by the instruction information notifying means is such that the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination together with the pressing combination. Is the push-combination first instruction information, and if the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination together with the push-combination, the push-combination second instruction information is used. According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the first push combination first instruction information and the second push match second instruction information both indicate the mode of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination. It is possible to know whether or not the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination in addition to the combination of the pressing combination by the means.

[Appendix 10]
The pachislot machine 1 in Appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, as shown in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075305), a gaming machine that cooperates with a mobile phone or a smartphone owned by a player is also known. In such a gaming machine, by registering a player in cooperation with a mobile phone or the like, a game history peculiar to the player can be managed, and an individual service that has not been provided in the past can be provided. .

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, a conventional player registration type gaming machine cannot always be said to have high convenience for the player, and a device for further improving the convenience for the player has been required.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to improve convenience in a player registration type gaming machine.

[Means for solving the problem]
A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that progresses a game by displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns in a variable manner in accordance with a result of an internal lottery. A light device B), a movable screen (e.g., a screen device C) that displays an image according to the effect by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device, and a position where the movable screen is arranged can be adjusted. A driving device (for example, a front screen driving mechanism E2 and a reel screen driving mechanism F2) for driving the movable screen, a history management means (for example, a sub-control board 72) for managing a game history indicating a game result, and the history management A top screen (for example, a top screen 211) displaying an outline game history that is a part of the game history managed by the means, and the top screen managed by the history management means. A plurality of display screens including a game information screen (for example, game information screens 213, 214, and 215) for displaying a detailed game history including the summary game history of the game history, which is separate from the movable screen. A display device (for example, the first sub-display device 201), input receiving means (for example, a touch sensor 201a) for receiving input information for controlling display on the display device, and the input information received by the input receiving means Control means (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling the display device, and registration receiving means (for example, a sub-control board 72) for receiving registration of a player who plays a game, When the registration accepting unit does not accept the registration, the display of the game information screen based on the input information is disabled, and the registration accepting unit If you are ready for recording is characterized in that for switching the display of the display can display device the game information screen based on the input information.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the registration of the player is not received, the game information screen for displaying the detailed game history cannot be displayed on the display device, but when the registration of the player is received, A game information screen can be displayed on the display device. Since a more detailed game history can be confirmed, the convenience of the player is improved. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, the convenience of the player registration type gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a display device for displaying a game information screen or the like is provided separately from a movable screen for displaying an image according to the effect. For example, a gaming machine that displays a game information screen or the like on a movable screen is also conceivable, but with such a gaming machine, it is difficult to display a game history during an effect, and in actuality, with a conventional gaming machine, Various display screens can be displayed on the movable screen only when no game is played. However, a player may want to confirm information other than the effect during the game, and the conventional gaming machine that can display the display screen only when the player is not playing the game has been inconvenient. In this regard, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, since the display device is provided separately from the movable screen, various display screens can be displayed even while the effect is being performed on the movable screen, thereby improving convenience. I do.

  In addition, when the image corresponding to the effect is displayed on the movable screen on which the arranged position is operated as in the gaming machine according to the present invention, various information other than the effect cannot be correctly displayed while the movable screen is operating. There is a fear. In this regard, by displaying various display screens on a display device provided separately from the movable screen, even when the movable screen is operating and performing a high-effect effect, various information other than the effect can be obtained. It can be displayed properly and convenience is improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the input receiving means is a touch sensor provided on a display unit of the display device.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the player can make an input via the touch sensor, the display on the display device can be controlled by an intuitive operation.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a pedestal portion (for example, pedestal portion 10) having a substantially horizontal surface, and an insertion port provided on a side of the substantially horizontal surface of the pedestal portion, for inserting a game medium for performing a game. (For example, a medal insertion slot 22 provided on the right side of the pedestal portion 10) and a bet button (for example, a MAX bet button 11 provided on the left side of the pedestal portion 10). It is provided near the insertion port and / or the bet button on a surface that stands substantially vertically.

  Generally, in a gaming machine, a medal slot is provided on the right side as viewed from the player on the pedestal portion, and a bet button and a start lever are provided on the left side as viewed from the player, so when performing a game, , The player operates the right or left side of the pedestal. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a display device is provided on a side (right side or left side) of a surface that stands substantially vertically from the pedestal portion, and the display of the display device is controlled based on a touch input detected by a touch sensor. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a display device or an input device (touch sensor) for controlling display is provided at a position where the player's hand is located during the game, and the operability of the player is improved. . In particular, since the display device with the touch sensor is provided on a surface that stands from the pedestal portion (horizontal surface), the player can operate the display device while placing his / her hand on the pedestal portion. As a result, not only the operability is improved, but also the fatigue associated with the operation can be reduced, so that an improvement in the operation rate can be expected.

[Appendix 11]
The pachislot machine 1 in Appendix 11 is as follows.

[Background Art]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as an “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as a “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the reel starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter, referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine to which a privilege is given according to a game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, as disclosed in Patent Document (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057732), in recent years, information for establishing an internal winning combination such as information for establishing an internal BACKGROUND ART A gaming machine that informs a player of advantageous information is known. In addition, such notification of information that is advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time), and an AT function is provided. Gaming machines are called AT machines or ART machines.

[Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Conventionally, in AT machines and ART machines, navigation was performed under the control of the sub (sub-control) side. However, in recent years, the presence or absence of navigation has an effect on a player's profit (so-called ball-out). It is required that navigation is performed on a main (main control) side that manages a profit of a player. Here, when navigating on the main side, the navigator has a strong meaning of assuring that profits are strictly managed, and it is required to strictly represent the current game situation.

  However, in such a navigation, there is a problem that the mode of the navigation becomes monotonous, and the variety of games is spoiled.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing various navigations while appropriately performing navigation that affects profits on the main side.

[Means for solving the problem]
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, and a symbol display means (for example, a part of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels). , A display window 4), a main control unit (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game, and a sub-control unit (for example, a sub-control board 72) for controlling effects related to the game. The control unit is configured to start operation detecting means (for example, start switch 6S, main control board 71) for detecting a start operation by the player, and to rotate the reel based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. The symbol changing means (for example, the motor drive circuit 39, the main control board 71) for changing the symbol, and the start operation detecting means detecting the start operation, when the internal winning combination is determined. The first symbol combination (for example, bell) or the second symbol combination (for example, bell spilled eyes) that can stop and display the first symbol combination (for example, bell spilled eyes) according to the order of the stop operation, and an internal winning When a combination is determined, a third symbol combination (for example, triple lip) or a fourth symbol combination (for example, replay) can be stopped and displayed in a second symbol (for example, F_confirmation) according to the order of the stop operation. Internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability from among a plurality of combinations including a reel, and a plurality of reels. A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 7S, a main control board 71) for detecting a stop operation for stopping, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and a stop by the stop operation detecting means; A reel stop control unit (for example, a main control board 71) for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which the operation is detected, thereby stopping the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit; (For example, a medal is paid out according to the combination of displayed symbols, and a benefit of shifting the RT gaming state is given. In addition, CZ, CZ, A privilege granting unit (for example, a main control board 71) that grants a privilege of granting a right to the ART and CT, and an instruction information notifying unit (for example, an information display) for notifying instruction information that uniquely indicates the mode of the stop operation 14, the main control board 71), and the sub-control unit executes an effect according to the mode of the stop operation (for example, the display unit 100, the sub-control board 72). ), Wherein the privilege providing means determines whether the first symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means in the game in which the first symbol combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the second symbol combination. Different bonuses are provided depending on whether the third symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display means in the game in which the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the third symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display device. When the same combination is displayed and the same privilege is given, and the first combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the instruction information notifying means sets the first combination of symbols on the symbol display means. In addition to informing the instruction information that indicates the order of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination, the effect execution means indicates the order of the stop operation for displaying the first symbol combination on the symbol display means. Run and before When the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the instruction information notifying unit does not notify the instruction information, and the effect execution unit transmits the third symbol combination or the fourth symbol combination to the symbol display unit. An effect indicating an order of a stop operation for displaying a symbol combination is executed.

  In such a gaming machine, the navigation that affects the profit (privilege) is managed on the main (main control unit) side, while the navigation that does not affect the profit is managed on the sub (sub-control unit) side. More specifically, the first combination that gives different benefits when the displayed combination of symbols is different (that is, the first combination includes a case where the first symbol combination is displayed and a case where the second symbol combination is displayed). The navigation is performed by both the instruction information notifying means controlled by the main side and the effect executing means controlled by the sub side, and the same privilege is provided even if the combination of the displayed symbols is different. The navigation of the second role to be given (that is, the same privilege is given to the case where the third symbol combination is displayed and the case where the fourth symbol combination is displayed) is the main side. Is not performed by the instruction information notifying means, but is performed only by the effect producing means on the sub side. Here, the navigation controlled by the sub side has a meaning as an effect, can be navigated in a variety of modes, and can realize various game characteristics. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the present invention, navigation that affects profits should be performed appropriately on the main side that manages profits, and navigation that does not affect profits should be performed on the sub side with diversity. Can be.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the fourth symbol combination is all symbols on a predetermined line formed by connecting unit symbol display areas for displaying one symbol of each reel in the symbol display means. A combination of symbols in which a specific symbol is displayed in a unit symbol display area, wherein the privilege granting unit grants a privilege with a predetermined probability when the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and Indicates an order of a stop operation for displaying the fourth symbol combination on the symbol display unit when the privilege granting unit grants a bonus in a game in which the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination. While the effect is executed, the effect is not executed when the privilege granting unit does not grant the privilege in the game in which the second combination is determined as the internal winning combination.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the second combination is determined as an internal winning combination and when it is determined that a bonus is to be provided, a navigation device that aims at a fourth symbol combination in which a specific symbol is aligned on a line. If the second role is determined to be an internal winning combination while it is determined not to provide a privilege, the navigation is not performed. Here, since whether or not to give a privilege is determined before the combination of symbols is displayed, the profit obtained by the player does not change depending on the combination of symbols displayed. By controlling such a navigation on the sub side, for example, an effect such as "aim for a specific symbol" can be executed in accordance with the type of privilege to be provided, and the variety of games can be secured. As a result, navigation that affects profits can be appropriately performed on the main side that manages profits, and navigation that does not affect profits can be performed on the sub side with diversity.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4L, 4C, 4R ... Display window, 7L, 7C, 7R ... Stop button, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub-control board, 100 ... Dot display

Claims (4)

A plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are displayed, a winning combination determined from among the plurality of winning combinations, and a display mode corresponding to the winning combination by stopping rotation of the reels according to a stop operation of the player. A game control device that is capable of being displayed and that can be provided with a game value according to the display mode,
A predetermined state start means capable of starting a predetermined state when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A variation unit that can vary a determination value serving as an end condition of the predetermined state according to a game value given in the predetermined state;
Predetermined state ending means capable of ending the predetermined state when the determination value becomes a reference value as a result of the fluctuation by the fluctuation means,
Further comprising
In the gaming machine in which the predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination, the changing means may or may not change the determination value according to a game value corresponding to the predetermined combination. . In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the predetermined state, the game control means can display the first display mode when the mode of the stop operation is the first operation mode. When the mode is the second operation mode, the second display mode can be displayed,
In a game in which the predetermined combination in the predetermined state is determined as a winning combination, the game apparatus further includes a notification unit capable of notifying a player of the first operation mode or the second operation mode,
The variation unit varies the determination value when the notification unit reports the first operation mode, and changes the determination value when the notification unit reports the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine does not fluctuate. A notification content determining unit capable of determining which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode the notification unit determines according to a predetermined parameter;
Parameter updating means for updating the predetermined parameter when the specific combination is determined as a winning combination,
The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising: The amount of game value provided when the first display mode is displayed and the amount of game value provided when the second display mode is displayed are the same. The gaming machine according to 2 or 3.

Images